JP2020089540A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing an increase in storage capacity of a table for storing an upper limit determination value and a lower limit determination value.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko game machine PY1, a game is played with a big winning determination probability corresponding to a set value by one set value being selected from a normal setting range of "1" to "6". A big winning determination table includes a table corresponding to a high probability state and a table corresponding to a normal probability state. A common lower limit determination value ("10001") for determining a big winning is stored in the table corresponding to the high probability state and the table corresponding to the normal probability state. The table corresponding to the high probability state stores the upper limit determination value for determining the big winning in the high probability state corresponding to each set value, and the table corresponding to the normal probability state stores the upper limit determination value for determining the big winning in the normal probability state corresponding to each set value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of a gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which, by setting a set value, a game is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value, as described in Patent Document 1 below, for example. .. In this type of pachinko gaming machine, the set value is selected from any one of predetermined set ranges from 1 to a predetermined upper limit set value (for example, "6"). Then, a table in which the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value for determining whether or not the jackpot is the jackpot is set in advance is stored, and the obtained jackpot random number is the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value. It will be judged as a jackpot if it is between.

JP, 2003-199931, A

However, when it is attempted to store the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value for determining whether or not it is a big hit in the table corresponding to each of the setting values, as compared with a gaming machine in which the setting value cannot be selected, There is a problem that the storage capacity of the table is significantly increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the table storing the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value.

The gaming machine of the present invention,
It is provided with a game control means capable of controlling to a normal probability state or a high probability state in which the jackpot determination probability is higher than the normal probability state,
By selecting one setting value from the preset setting range, in the gaming machine to be played with the jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value,
A high accuracy table corresponding to the high probability state and a normal table corresponding to the normal probability state,
At least one of the high accuracy table or the normal table, a common lower limit determination value for determining a big hit is stored,
In the high accuracy table, corresponding to each set value included in the setting range, high accuracy upper limit determination value for determining a big hit in the high probability state is stored,
In the normal table, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range, the normal upper limit determination value for determining a big hit in the normal probability state is stored,
In the gaming machine, the game control means can determine whether it is a big hit with reference to the common lower limit determination value and the high accuracy upper limit determination value or the normal upper limit determination value. is there.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the table that stores the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value.

It is a perspective view of the game machine according to the embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a structure of a gaming machine frame included in the gaming machine. It is a front view of the game machine according to the embodiment. It is a front view of a game board provided in the same gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the A portion shown in FIG. 4, and is a view showing display devices provided in the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electric configuration on the game control board side of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the production control board side of the same game machine. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the game machine concerning this form. It is a perspective view showing a back side of a game machine according to a comparative example. In a comparative example, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the power supplied between the power supply unit, the payout control board, and the game control board. It is a figure for explaining the time of in-circuit inspection of a comparative example. In the present embodiment, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the power supplied between the power supply unit, the payout control board, and the game control board. It is a figure for explaining the time of in-circuit inspection of this form. It is a hit type determination table. It is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "3" It is a jackpot determination table used, (D) is a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "4", (E) is a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "5", and (F) is a setting It is a jackpot determination table used when the value is "6". (A) is a reach determination table, (B) is a normal symbol hit determination table, (C) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an opening pattern determination table of Den Chu. (A) is a perspective view showing a game control board and a game control board case, and (B) is a front view showing a game control board and a game control board case. It is an exploded perspective view showing a game control board and a game control board case. 20A is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 20B, and FIG. 20B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 20B. It is a front view showing a game control board and a game control board case. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display device. 6 is a table showing types of operations that can be performed when the power is turned on. It is a figure for explaining the change of the production mode when the setting confirmation operation is performed through the RAM clear switch operation from the setting change mode transition operation. It is a figure showing an electric circuit around a game control microcomputer. (A) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in a rotation position, and (B) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the middle of an operation from the rotation position to the standby position. , (C) are diagrams showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is at the standby position. It is a rear view of an inner frame. (A) is a diagram showing a case where an error display is executed on the 7-segment display, and (B) is an operation suggestion image on the display screen, an error sound output from the speaker, and a frame lamp and a panel lamp. And FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating that a display mode switches for every specific time, after initial display is performed by a 7-segment display. It is a figure for demonstrating the case where the base before 1 time, the base before 2 times, and the base before 3 times are not memorized yet. It is a diagram showing nine types of effect symbols (from the first effect symbol to the ninth effect symbol). (A) is an effect symbol lottery table used when the setting value is "1", (B) is an effect symbol lottery table used when the setting value is "2", and (C) is a setting value "3" It is a production symbol lottery table used when, (D) is a production symbol lottery table used when the setting value is "4", (E) is a production symbol lottery table used when the setting value is "5", (F) is a production symbol lottery table used when the setting value is "6". It is the figure in order to explain the design setting suggestion production which is executed when production design is stopped and indicated in the loss aspect. It is a figure for explaining high setting suggestion production performed when it is SP reach loss. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flow chart of power-on processing. It is a flow chart of setting change mode processing. It is a flow chart of setting value confirmation mode processing. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of power failure recovery. It is a flowchart of an error mode process. It is a flow chart of main side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a base calculation process. It is a flow chart of base display processing. It is a flow chart of base display processing. It is a flow chart of power failure monitoring processing. It is a flow chart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is the flowchart of production design selection processing. It is a flow chart of variation effect pattern selection processing. In the second embodiment, (A) is a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "1", (B) is a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "2", and (C) is a setting value "3". Is a jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "4". In the second mode, (A) is a display conversion table, and (B) is a table showing the relationship between set values and set value designation commands. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a setting value, the display value displayed by a 7 segment display device, and a production mode in a 2nd form. In the third mode, (A) is a display conversion table, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a set value and a set value designation command. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a setting value, the display value displayed by a 7 segment display device, and a production mode in a 3rd form. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting value designation|designated command containing the information of H in a 3rd form. It is a jackpot determination table of a comparative example. It is a jackpot determination table of the fourth form. It is a jackpot determination table of the 1st modification of the 4th form. It is a jackpot determination table of the 2nd modification of the 4th form. It is a jackpot determination table of the 3rd modification of the 4th form. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of a comparative example. It is a flow chart of processing at the time of power-on in the 4th form. It is a flow chart of other power-on processing in the fourth mode. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process in the fourth embodiment. In a modification, it is a figure for demonstrating the change of the production mode at the time of performing a setting confirmation operation through a RAM clear switch operation from a setting change mode transfer operation. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining that the display mode of the set value is changed by the setting confirmation operation in the modification. It is a figure for demonstrating that a setting value and a base are simultaneously displayed on a 7 segment display in a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating that a 1st display means which displays a setting value and a 2nd display means which displays a base in a modification. In a modification, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the in-circuit inspection of the electric circuit shown in FIG. In a modification, it is an electric circuit diagram for explaining the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the in-circuit inspection of the electric circuit shown in FIG. In a modified example, (A) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the standby position, and (B) shows an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the middle of an operation from the standby position to the rotating position. It is a figure which shows, (C) is a figure which shows an electric circuit when a setting key cylinder is in a rotation position.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1 which is an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described as being the same as the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is set as a direction closer to the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is set as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. To do.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 2 constitutes an outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and includes an outer frame 22, an inner frame 21, and a front door 23 (front frame). The outer frame 22 is a vertical rectangular frame body that forms an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The inner frame 21 is arranged inside the outer frame 22 and is a vertical rectangular frame body to which the game board 1 described later is mounted. The front door 23 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21, and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 1. The front door 23 is a portion that directly faces the player, and has various decorations.

The gaming machine frame 2 is configured to include a hinge portion 24 on the left end side. By this hinge portion 24, the front door 23 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21, respectively, and the inner frame 21 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the front door 23, respectively. Is becoming An opening 23a is formed in the center of the front door 23, and a transparent transparent plate 23t is attached to the opening 23a so that a player can visually recognize a game area 6 described later. Although the transparent plate 23t is a glass plate in this embodiment, it may be a transparent synthetic resin plate. That is, the transparent plate 23t only needs to be capable of visually recognizing the game area 6 from the front.

In the gaming machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 is regarded as a “base frame part”, the inner frame 21 and the front door 23 can be regarded as a “front frame part”. Further, in the gaming machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21 are regarded as corresponding to the “base frame part”, the front door 23 can be regarded as corresponding to the “front frame part”.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front door 23 has a handle 72k (game ball driving means) for firing a game ball with a firing strength according to a rotation angle, and a hit ball supply tray (for storing a game ball). An upper plate) 34 and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 35 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 34 are provided. Further, the front door 23 is provided with an effect button (input unit) 40k and a select button 42k which can be operated by the player at the time of effect executed as the game progresses. The select button (cross key) 42k includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a frame lamp 212 for decoration and a speaker (not shown in FIG. 1) for outputting sound.

A game board 1 shown in FIG. 4 is attached to the game machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 1 is formed with a rail member 62 which surrounds a game area 6 into which a game ball fired by operating a handle 72k flows down. The game board 1 is provided with a large number of decorative board lamps 54. Further, in the game area 6, a plurality of game nails that guide the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The game board 1 has a plate-shaped member arranged on the front side and a back unit (a unit for mounting various control boards, an image display device 50, a harness, etc., which will be described later) arranged on the rear side. It is a thing.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 6, an image display device 50 (effect display means, image display means) which is a liquid crystal display device is provided. The image display device may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device. The display screen 50a (display unit) of the image display device 50 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols EZ (decorative symbols) synchronized with variable display of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. .. The effect of displaying the effect symbol EZ is referred to as effect symbol variation effect. The effect symbol variation effect may be referred to as "decorative symbol variation effect" or simply "variation effect". The effect symbol display area includes, for example, three effect symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol EZ1 is displayed in the left effect symbol display area, the middle effect symbol EZ2 is displayed in the middle effect symbol display area, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is displayed in the right effect symbol display area.

Each of the effect symbols EZ is composed of a plurality of symbols representing the numbers "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 50 is a first special symbol displayed on a later-described first special symbol display 81a and a second special symbol display 81b by a combination of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3. And the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with a variation such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery on the image display device 50, not on the first special figure display 81a or the second special figure display 81b. The position of the effect symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol EZ, for example, there is a mode of scrolling vertically.

The image display device 50 displays a display pattern such as the effect design variation effect using the effect pattern EZ as described above, a big hit effect performed in parallel with the big hit game, a demo effect for waiting for a customer (customer waiting effect), and the like. It is displayed on 50a. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol EZ such as numbers, effect images other than the effect symbol EZ such as the background image and the character image are also displayed.

In addition, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a hold icon display area for displaying a hold icon HA (effect holding image) according to the number of stored first special figure hold and second special figure hold described later. Due to the display of the hold icon HA, the number of stored first special figure reservations displayed by the first special figure reservation indicator 83a described later and the second special character displayed by the second special figure reservation indicator 83b described later. It is possible to show the number of stored figures to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center frame 61 (inner wall portion) is arranged near the center of the game area 6 and in front of the image display device 50. At the lower part of the center frame 61, a stage 61s capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface to a first starting port 11 described later is formed. A warp 61w is provided on the left side of the center frame 61 to let the game ball flow in from the entrance and to let the game ball flow from the exit to the stage 61s. Further, on the upper part of the center frame 61, a board movable body 55k that can move up and down is provided. The movable board 55k is movable from an origin position above the display screen 50a to a production position overlapping the center of the display screen 50a in the front-rear direction.

Below the image display device 50 in the game area 6, there is provided a first starting prize device 11D having a first starting port 11 (ball entrance) in which the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. The 1st starting opening 11 is also called a 1st entrance, a fixed entrance, a 1st starting winning opening, and a 1st starting area. Further, the first start winning device 11D is also referred to as a first ball winning device, a fixed ball winning device, or a first starting winning device. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 11 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit lottery, that is, the determination and the acquisition of the big hit random numbers, etc.).

In addition, below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a normal variable winning device (normal electric prized so-called electric chu) 12D having a second starting port 12 (ball entrance) is provided. The 2nd starting opening 12 is also called a 2nd entrance, a variable entrance, a 2nd starting winning opening, and a 2nd starting area. The electric chew 12D is also referred to as a second ball entry means, a variable ball entry means, or a second start winning device. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 12 is an opportunity for the lottery of the second special symbol (the big hit lottery).

The electric chew 12D includes an electric chew opening/closing member 12k (ball entrance opening/closing member) that opens and closes, and opens and closes the second starting port 12 by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The power cable opening/closing member 12k is driven by a power cable solenoid 12s described later. When the electric Chu opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 12, and when it is in the closed state, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 12. Become. In other words, the second starting opening 12 is a starting opening in which the ease of entering the game ball can be changed. In addition, if the electric chew makes it easier to enter the second starting opening when the electric chew opening/closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, 2 It does not have to make it impossible to enter the starting port.

Further, on the right side of the first starting opening 11 in the game area 6, a special winning device (special electric accessory) 14D having a special winning opening 14 is provided. The special winning opening 14 is also called a special winning opening (special winning section). The big winning device 14D is also referred to as an attacker (AT), a special winning means, or a special variable winning device. The special winning device 14D includes an AT opening/closing member 14k (special winning opening opening/closing member) that takes an open state (first state) and a closed state (second state). It opens and closes. The AT opening/closing member 14k is driven by an AT solenoid 14s described later. The special winning opening 14 allows a game ball to enter only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is open.

Further, on the right side of the center frame 61, a gate 13 through which game balls can pass is provided. The gate 13 is also called a passage opening or a passage area. The passage of the game ball to the gate 13 is an execution trigger of a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (per random number)) that determines whether or not to open the electric Chu 12D. Further, a plurality of general winning openings 10 are provided below the game area 6. Further, at the lowermost part of the game area 6, there is provided an outlet 19 for discharging the game balls that have been hit in the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6.

In this way, in the game area 6 in which various winning openings are arranged, the left game area 6L (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area 6R (second game area) on the right side. There is. The batting method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6L is referred to as left hitting. On the other hand, the batting method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6R is called right hitting. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing by left-handing is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing by right-handing. , Second flow path R2.

A first starting opening 11, a general winning opening 10, a power tube 12D, and an outlet 19 are provided on the first flow path R1. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1, the player can aim for winning at the first starting opening 11 and the general winning opening 10. Since the gate is not arranged on the first flow path R1, the electric tube 12D will not be opened when left-handed.

On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a gate 13, a general winning opening 10, a big winning device 14D, a power tube 12D, and an outlet 19 are provided. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player can aim to pass through the gate 13 and win the general winning opening 10, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a display device 8 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 1. In the display devices 8, as shown in FIG. 5, a first special symbol display 81a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 81b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol. A public figure display 82 for variably displaying (Public figure) is included. The first special symbol is also called the first special symbol or special symbol 1, and the second special symbol is also called the second special symbol or special symbol 2. In addition, the ordinary design is also called a general design.

Further, the display device 8 holds the operation of the first special figure display indicator 83a and the second special figure display 81b, which displays the number of stored operations of the first special figure display 81a (first special figure hold). A second special figure hold indicator 83b for displaying the number of (second special figure hold) and a general figure hold indicator 84 for displaying the number of operation hold (general figure hold) of the general figure indicator 82 are included. Has been.

The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 11. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 12. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol (special symbol). Further, the first special figure display 81a and the second special figure display 81b may be collectively referred to as the special figure display 81. In addition, the first special figure reservation indicator 83a and the second special figure reservation indicator 83b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 83. The first special figure hold and the second special figure hold may be collectively called special figure hold.

In the special symbol display device 81, the special symbol (identification symbol) is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped, so that the lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 11 or the second starting orifice 12 (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) will be announced. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a specific special symbol that has been determined in advance (a special symbol in a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), in the opening pattern according to the type of the specific symbol that is stopped and displayed (that is, the type of jackpot that was won) A jackpot game (an example of a special game) for opening the special winning opening 14 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, the special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the big hit lottery by its lighting mode. is there. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see 1, 2, etc. from the left as follows: "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). The jackpot pattern in which the fifth and sixth LEDs are lit is displayed. Further, in the case of a loss, a loss pattern in which only the LED on the far right is turned on is displayed, such as "●●●●●●●○". You may employ|adopt the aspect which turns off all the LEDs as a loss design. The lost design is not a special special design. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, that each LED lights so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. That is the mode. It should be noted that the mode of variable display may be any mode in which all the LEDs flash at once unless the LEDs are stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when there is a winning (ball entry) of a game ball into the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12, various random number values (numerical information (Determination information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later. In detail, if the winning in the first starting opening 11 is stored as a first special figure reservation, it is stored in a first special drawing holding storage unit 105a described later, and if the winning in the second starting opening 12 is performed, the second special drawing is held. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 105b described later as a figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 105, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is “4”.

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the special figure hold means that the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the special symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during or during execution of a special game, it is possible to reserve the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83. Specifically, each of the special figure reservation indicators 83 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the number of special figure reservations is displayed by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by the passage of the game ball to the gate 13. In the ordinary symbol display device 82, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 is notified by displaying the ordinary symbol in a variable display (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (ordinary symbol stopped symbol, the ordinary symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. If the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stopping mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the second starting opening 12 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Auxiliary game to be performed is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 12 will be described later.

Specifically, the universal symbol display device 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 5), and displays the ordinary symbol corresponding to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is displayed such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as the normally lost pattern. Note that the normal lost design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on. It should be noted that the mode of variable display may be any mode in which all the LEDs flash at once unless the LEDs are stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a universal figure reservation in the universal figure reservation storage unit 106 described later. Once remembered. There is an upper limit to the number of public figure reservations that can be stored in the general figure reservation storage unit 106, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4".

The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage unit 106 is exhausted when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure hold becomes possible. Digesting the universal figure hold means determining a normal symbol random number (random number per hit) corresponding to the universal figure hold, and executing a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage with the predetermined number as the upper limit.

Then, the number of such figure holdings is displayed on the figure holding display 84. Specifically, the universal figure hold indicator 84 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of universal figure reserves by turning on the LEDs for the number of universal figure reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. As shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a game control board 100 (main control board) that performs control related to game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and effects to be executed as the game progresses. A production control board 120 (sub-control board) for performing control relating to the game, a payout control board 170 for performing control relating to the payout of gaming balls, and the like. The game control board 100 constitutes a main control section together with the payout control board 170, and the effect control board 120 constitutes a sub control section together with an image control board 140 and a sub drive board 162 described later.

The sub-control unit includes at least the effect control board 120 and can control the game effect using the effect means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the panel lamp 54, the panel movable body 55k, the frame lamp 212, etc.). Good.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 also includes a power supply unit 190. The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) inputs AC24V power from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and various voltages (DC5V, DC12V, DC18V, DC24V) necessary for the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on the AC24V power source. , DC37V) (electric power). The DC5V power is mainly used as a power source for various integrated circuits (ICs). The DC 12V power is mainly used as a power source for various sensors and solenoids. The DC 18V power is mainly used as a power source for various LEDs. Moreover, the power of DC24V and the power of DC37V are mainly used as a power source of a motor (driving means) for performance.

The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) first supplies the generated power to the payout control board 170. Then, the generated power is supplied to the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 via the payout control board 170. Further, the generated power is supplied to other devices via the payout control board 170, the game control board 100, and the effect control board 120. In this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is not provided with the backup power supply circuit. This point will be described in detail later.

A power switch 195 (power switching unit) is connected to the power unit 190. The power switch 195 is capable of switching to a power-on state (ON state) in which power can be supplied or a cut-off state (OFF state) in which power cannot be supplied based on an AC 24 V power source supplied from the outside. In other words, the power switch 195 switches ON/OFF of the power source by ON operation or OFF operation. When the power switch 195 is turned ON, the power switch 195 is turned ON, and when the power switch 195 is turned OFF. It will be cut off. When the power switch 195 is in the ON state, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-on state, and when the power switch 195 is in the OFF state, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-off state.

Further, the power supply unit 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear operation means) that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 191 is information related to a game stored in a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, information on a game state such as a high probability state, special figure hold or jackpot). It is for erasing information such as the result of the judgment. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is on the power supply unit 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (specifically, the power switch 195 in the power supply unit 190 when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side). On the right side of). Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 can be operated only by an employee or the like of the game arcade who can open the gaming machine frame 2. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 191 is an operating means which is substantially inoperable by the player. The RAM clear switch 191 is a tact switch, and when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. The state where the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed is called the ON state of the RAM clear switch 191, and the state where the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed is called the OFF state of the RAM clear switch 191. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply unit 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate, and is provided, for example, on the game control board 100 or a dedicated board. Is also good.

As shown in FIG. 6, on the game control board 100, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted. In the game control microcomputer 101 (main control means, game control means), a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing a program for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM 104 used as a work memory, A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in the game ROM 103, and a game I/O (Input/Output) port unit 118 for inputting/outputting data and signals are included. In the game RAM 104 (storage means), the special figure reservation storage section 105 (first special figure reservation storage section 105a and second special figure reservation storage section 105b) and the general figure reservation storage section 106, as well as the settings described later, are set. A value information storage unit 107 and a base information storage unit 108 are provided. Further, on the game control board 100, as shown in FIG. 8, a 7-segment display 300 and a setting key cylinder 180 are provided. The 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 6, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a relay board 110. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the game control board 100, and a signal is output from the game control board 100 to each solenoid. Specifically, as the sensors, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, a special winning opening sensor 14a, a general winning opening sensor 10a, and a discharge opening sensor 18a are connected.

The first starting opening sensor 11a is provided in the first starting opening 11 and detects a game ball that has won the first starting opening 11. The second starting port sensor 12a is provided in the second starting port 12 and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a is provided in the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The special winning opening sensor 14a is provided in the special winning opening 14 and detects a game ball that has won the special winning opening 14. The general winning opening sensor 10a is provided in the general winning opening 10 and detects a game ball that has won the general winning opening 10.

The discharge port sensor 18a is provided in a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and detects the game ball that has passed through the discharge port. The outlet is provided at the lower end of the inner frame 21, and the game balls hit in the game area 6 are the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the out. After entering any one of the ports 19, it finally passes through the discharge port. Therefore, by detecting the game balls that have passed through the discharge port with the discharge port sensor 18a, it is possible to detect all the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6. In addition, the number of all the game balls hit in the game area 6 can be called the total number of shot balls. Further, since the total number of shot balls is the same as the number of all game balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it can also be called the number of discharged balls, the total number of discharged balls, or the number of out balls.

As the solenoids, an electric power solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s are connected. The power cable solenoid 12s drives the power cable opening/closing member 12k of the power cable 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the special winning device 14D.

Furthermore, on the game control board 100, a special figure display 81 (first special figure display 81a and second special figure display 81b), a general figure display 82, a special figure reservation display 83 (first special figure reservation display) The device 83a, the second special figure reservation indicator 83b), and the general figure reservation indicator 84 are connected. That is, the display control of these display devices 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

In addition, the game control board 100 sends various commands and signals to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 170, a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enables a ball to be lent out based on information on a prepaid card or the like inserted), and a prize ball payout device 73. In addition to being connected, the launch device 72 is connected via the launch control circuit 175. The launching device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 (first control board) is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “payout control microcomputer”) 171 capable of executing control processing related to payout of game balls according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 (payout control means) has a payout ROM 173 storing a program for controlling payout, a payout RAM 174 used as a work memory, and a payout ROM 173 for executing a program stored in the payout ROM 173. A CPU 172 and a payout I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 178 for inputting/outputting data and signals are included. The payout ROM 173 may be externally attached.

The payout control board 170 drives the award ball motor 73m of the award ball payout device 73 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 101 or a signal from the card unit CU connected to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Payouts and pay balls. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 11 (wins), a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a prize ball signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 11 to the payout control board 170. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171 that has received the prize ball signal drives the firing solenoid 72s via the firing control circuit 175 based on the prize ball number information stored in the payout ROM 173 to perform the first start. Prize balls (for example, three) are paid out based on the ball entering the mouth 11. At this time, the game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for counting, and a detection signal from the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170. Here, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 170 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 179. This point will be described later in detail.

When the player operates the handle 72k (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 72, the touch switch 72a detects the contact with the handle 72k, and the launching volume 72b detects the rotation amount of the handle 72k. Then, the firing solenoid 72s is driven so that the game ball is fired with the strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 72b. In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds.

The game control board 100 also sends various commands to the effect control board 120. The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as communication direction regulating means is interposed.

As shown in FIG. 7, an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted on the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 executes an effect ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling effects as the game progresses, an effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a program stored in the effect ROM 123. An effect CPU 122 and an effect I/O port unit 138 for inputting/outputting data and signals are included. A setting value flag 125, which will be described later, is provided in the effect RAM 124. The effect ROM 123 may be externally attached. As described above, the effect control board 120 is configured to be supplied with electric power (for example, DC 5V electric power) from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is connected to the image control board 140 and the sub-drive board 162 (sub-drive circuit). The effect control microcomputer 121 (effect control means) of the effect control board 120 causes the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform display control of the image display device 50 based on the command received from the game control board 100. The effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a control signal via the image input circuit 147 of the image control board 140. Then, the image CPU 141 transmits a control signal to the image display device 50 via the image output circuit 148 of the image control board 140.

The image RAM 143 of the image control board 140 is a memory for expanding image data. The image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 50, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers and symbols (including decorative patterns) and background. Image data such as an image is stored. The image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads out image data from the image ROM 142 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

A speaker 620 (sound output means) is connected to the image control board 140. Based on the command received from the game control board 100, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a sound, a song, a sound effect or the like from the speaker 620 via the sound CPU 149 of the image control board 140. The voice CPU 149 controls the voice of the speaker 620 via the voice control circuit 150 based on the instruction from the image CPU 141. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 620 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. However, the acoustic data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Although the image control board 140 is made to perform the voice control of the speaker 620, a voice control board may be provided separately from the image control board 140 and the voice control board may be made to perform the voice control of the speaker 620. In this case, the sound control board may be connected to the effect control board 120, or may be connected to the effect control board 120 via the image control board 140. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the lamps such as the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 via the sub-drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. .. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting/extinguishment, light emission color, etc., lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and emits light of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. In addition, the data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the drive of the movable board 55k via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the board movable body 55k, and controls the drive of the motor for driving the board movable body 55k according to the operation pattern data. I do. The data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the motion pattern data.

Note that a CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to perform lighting control of the lamp and drive control of the movable board 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162, and the ROM may store data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

Further, to the effect control board 120, an input section detection sensor (effect button detection sensor) 40a and a select button detection sensor 42a are connected. The input unit detection sensor 40a detects that the input unit 40k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the input section 40k is pressed, a detection signal is output from the input section detection sensor 40a to the effect control board 120. The select button detection sensor 42a detects that the select button 42k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 42k is pressed, the select button detection sensor 42a outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 120.

6 and 7 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to the last, and not only the boards shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 are provided. Except for the game control board 100, any of the plurality of boards shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 may be configured as one board, or one board illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 7 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. Power Supply Unit Next, the power supply unit 190 in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 shows a power supply unit 190 of this embodiment, and FIG. 9 shows a power supply board 190X of a comparative example. Hereinafter, the power supply unit 190 and the power supply board 190X will be described in comparison.

The power supply board 190X is generally used as a power supply unit in a pachinko gaming machine. When the power supply board 190X is used as the power supply unit, the power supply board 190X is a test target board. Therefore, there is a circumstance that it is not allowed to mount surface mount components on the power supply board 190X, and it is necessary to mount lead components (Dip components) with lead wires. A backup power supply circuit is provided on most of the power supply boards 190X, and this backup power supply circuit can supply backup power to the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 when the power is cut off. However, the power supply board 190X having a backup power supply circuit peculiar to a pachinko gaming machine becomes a custom-made product. From the above, the power supply board 190X has a problem in that the lead component cannot be replaced with the surface mount component and the backup power supply circuit is provided, so that the power supply substrate 190X has to be a relatively large size as a custom-made product. It was

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is used instead of the power supply board 190X. The power supply unit 190 is modularized and is a general-purpose product. Therefore, when the power supply unit 190 is used as the power supply unit, the power supply unit 190 does not become the test target board. Therefore, not only the lead component but also the surface mount component can be mounted on the power supply unit 190. As a result, the power supply unit 190 can be made small (compact) by replacing the conventional lead component with the surface mount component. Further, since the power supply unit 190 is a general-purpose product, it does not have a backup power supply circuit peculiar to a pachinko gaming machine. As a result, the power supply unit 190 can be made smaller.

Thus, as can be seen from the comparison between the power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 8 and the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 9, the power supply unit 190 can be made smaller than the power supply board 190X. In the case of the power supply board 190X, it is necessary to mount lead components that have become difficult to obtain in recent years, but the power supply unit 190 has an advantage that it is not necessary to mount lead components that are difficult to obtain.

Next, the arrangement of the power supply unit 190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. A payout control board 170 is disposed behind the power supply unit 190, and at least a part of the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 overlap in the front-rear direction. The power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the transparent outer cover 25 provided at the rear of the game board 1. Therefore, the payout control board 170 can be referred to as a “frame side board” provided in the gaming machine frame 2 (inner frame 21) instead of the game board 1. The payout control board 170 is housed in a payout control board case 170A that does not hinder the visibility of the payout control microcomputer 171.

On the other hand, the game control board 100, the effect control board 120, the sub-drive board 162, and the image control board 140 described above are arranged inside the outer cover 25 of the game board 1. Therefore, the game control board 100, the effect control board 120, the sub-drive board 162, and the image control board 140 can be said to be a “board-side board” provided on the game board 1 instead of the gaming machine frame 2. The game control board (main control board) 100 is housed in a game control board case (main board case) 100A that does not interfere with the visibility of the game control microcomputer 101. The game control board 100 and the game control board case 100A constitute a game control board unit (main control board unit) 100B. The game control board unit 100B will be described later.

In this way, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged on the outer side of the game board 1 and at a short distance on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. In particular, since the payout control board 170 is arranged so as to partially overlap the power supply unit 190 in the front-rear direction, it has a positional relationship in which wiring can be easily connected. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3 (see FIG. 12) described later. Thereby, the electric power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is first supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged immediately in front of the payout control board 170, and most of it is not exposed. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side, the power supply unit 190 is hidden behind the payout control board 170 (to the front), and is hardly visible. Therefore, it is difficult for the power supply unit 190 to connect the wiring to the other control boards except for the payout control board 170 which is arranged immediately behind.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100 are not directly connected by a harness, but the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4 (see FIG. 12) described later. Thereby, the power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170, and then supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100. In this way, it is possible to supply DC5V power to the game control board 100 while simplifying the wiring arrangement.

In short, conventionally, a method of branching the DC5V power generated by the power supply unit 190 (power supply board 190X) to the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 is generally used. However, in this method, as shown in FIG. 8, when the power supply unit 190 is arranged so as to be hidden in front of the payout control board 170, it is difficult to connect the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game control board 100, which is a board-side board, is connected to the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, which is a frame-side board, in order to simplify the wiring arrangement. As a result, the DC 5V power generated by the power supply unit 190 is once supplied to the game control board 100 via the payout control board 170, and a new power supply relationship is established.

Here, the merits when the power supply unit 190 can be made small will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. The power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 8 can be made smaller in size in the vertical direction than the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 9 by making it compact. As a result, the power supply unit 190 having a short vertical length can be arranged below the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

By the way, the front side of the power supply unit 190 is a lower side portion of the front door 23. The lower portion of the front door 23 is an operation mechanism unit 210 (see FIG. 1) including a hitting ball supply tray 34 (upper tray), a lower tray 35, an input unit 40k (effect button), a select button 42k, and the like. Therefore, as described above, when the power supply unit 190 having a short vertical length is arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the vertical length of the operating mechanism unit 210 is shortened and the operating mechanism unit is shortened. The upper end position of 210 can be lowered. As a result, the game board 1 (see FIG. 4) can be expanded downward and the lower end position of the game area 6 can be lowered. As a result, there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be improved by expanding the game area 6.

4. Electric circuit between the power supply unit, the payout control board, and the game control board Next, the electric circuit DK1 (see FIG. 12) between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of this embodiment will be described. .. However, before describing the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment, the electric circuit DKX between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of the comparative example will be described based on FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the comparative example, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by the harness HN1. The connector CN1 at one end of the harness HN1 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN2 at the other end of the harness HN1 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN1 is provided with a wiring h1 for supplying DC5V (specific voltage) power (hereinafter also referred to as “normal power supply”) from the power supply unit 190 and a wiring h2 serving as a ground line. In addition to the wiring h1 and the wiring h2, the harness HN1 is provided with, for example, a wiring for supplying DC12V power from the power supply unit 190, but the description thereof will be omitted.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line a1 (specific power line) between the connector CN2 and the branch portion j1. The power line a1 is connected to the wiring h1 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2. In the payout control board 170, there is a power line a2 connected to the ground G. The power line a2 is connected to the wiring h2 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2.

A filter (noise removal means) NF1 is connected to the connector CN2 side of the power line a1. The filter NF1 is composed of two coils (inductors) and one capacitor, and is a so-called three-element type low-pass filter. In the filter NF1, the two coils are connected in series with the power line a1. Further, one coil is connected in parallel to the power line a1. That is, one side of the capacitor is connected to the power line a1 and the other side of the capacitor is connected to the ground G. The filter NF1 removes high frequency noise from the DC 5V power supplied through the power line a1.

Further, a capacitor CA1 is connected in parallel to the branch line j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the filter NF1. The capacitor CA1 is an electrolytic capacitor having a relatively large capacitance (for example, the capacitance is 470 μF). The electrolytic capacitor is a capacitor in which a metal oxidized by an electrolytic solution serves as an anode, a film formed on the surface of the metal serves as a dielectric, and the electrolytic solution serves as a cathode. The capacitor CA1 prevents the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power source becomes large.

In addition, a capacitor CA2 is connected in parallel to the branch line j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the capacitor CA1. The capacitor CA2 is a ceramic capacitor having a smaller electrostatic capacity than the capacitor CA1 (for example, an electrostatic capacity of 0.1 μF). The ceramic capacitor is a capacitor having ceramic (metal oxide sintered body) as a dielectric. The capacitor CA2 removes high frequency noise from the normal power source in the power line a1.

There is a power line c1 (first branch power line) extending from the branch portion j1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line c1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply (DC5V power from the power supply unit 190) is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring h1, the power line a1, and the power line c1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can normally operate based on the normal power supply.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN2. The connector CN3 at one end of the harness HN2 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN4 at the other end of the harness HN2 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN2 is provided with a wiring h3 for supplying normal power and a wiring h4 for supplying backup power described below. In addition to the wiring h3 and the wiring h4, the harness HN2 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying DC12V power from the power supply unit 190, but the description thereof is omitted.

The payout control board 170 has a power line b1 extending from the branch portion j1 to the wiring h3 of the harness HN2, and the resistor T1 is connected in series to the branch portion j1 side of the power line b1. The resistor T1 suppresses a current flowing from the branch portion j1 to the resistor T1. A diode DO1 is connected to the power line b1 closer to the connector CN3 than the resistor T1. The diode DO1 permits the flow of current from the diode DO1 toward the connector CN3 side, while restricting the flow of current from the diode DO1 toward the branch portion j1 side. By this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge accumulated in a capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) described later from traveling from the diode DO1 to the branch portion j1.

A capacitor CA3 is connected in parallel to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the diode DO1. The capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor having a rated voltage of 5.5 V and a capacitance that is much larger than that of the capacitors CA1 and CA2 (for example, the capacitance is 0.33 F). The electric double layer capacitor is a capacitor whose operating principle is the electric double layer generated at the interface between the activated carbon and the electrolytic solution. The capacitor CA3 releases the accumulated electric charge when the normal power supply from the power supply unit 190 is no longer supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control board 170 when the power is cut off. As a result, it is possible to supply DC5V power (hereinafter also referred to as "backup power supply") to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 described later and the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 described later.

Further, a capacitor CA4 is connected in parallel to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the capacitor CA3. The capacitor CA4 is a ceramic capacitor similar to the above-mentioned capacitor CA2. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied through the power line b1.

Further, there is a branch portion j2 on the power supply line b1 closer to the connector CN3 than the capacitor CA4. Then, there is a power line b2 extending from the branch portion j2 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line b2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 is discharged at the time of power interruption, so that the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line b1 and the power line b2. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the backup power supply even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout information stored in the payout RAM 174 from being erased.

The power line b1 is connected to the wiring h3 via the connector CN3. The wiring h3 is connected to the power line d1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 through the power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 when the power is cut off. . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the backup power supply even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the game information stored in the game RAM 104 from being erased. The power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 correspond to the “second branch power line”.

The payout control board 170 has a power line c2 extending from the branch portion j1, and the power line c2 is connected to the wiring h4 via a connector CN3. The wiring h4 is connected to the power line d2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d2 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, the power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 through the wiring h1, the power line a1, the power line c2, the wiring h4, and the power line d2. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can normally operate based on the normal power supply (DC5V power from the power supply unit 190).

As described above, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the payout control board 170, it is possible to supply normal power to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line c1 extending from the branch portion j1. is there. Further, it is possible to supply the normal power source to the capacitor CA3 and store the electric charge in the capacitor CA3 by the power line b1 extending from the branch portion j1. When the power is cut off, the backup power supply can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line b1 and the power line b2 extending from the branch portion j1. Thus, by utilizing the branch of the power line c1 and the power line b1 and the power line b2, it is possible to supply the normal power supply and the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 with a simple circuit configuration.

Further, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, at the time of power interruption, the capacitor CA3 provided on the payout control board 170 supplies the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line b1 and the power line b2. It is possible and can be supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100 via the power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1. That is, the backup power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 without providing a capacitor as a backup power supply means on the power supply board. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 (see FIG. 8) can be used instead of the power supply board 190X (see FIG. 9), and a new backup power supply relationship can be established.

By the way, the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example has the following problems. First, for various control boards (electronic circuit boards) including the payout control board 170, an in-circuit inspection is performed during the manufacturing process. In the in-circuit inspection, with the electronic components mounted on the board, a signal is sent to each electronic component using the in-circuit tester, and the number of components (value of resistance, value of capacitor, value of inductance) is incorrect. It is to inspect whether or not there is no open or short circuit in soldering, no floating of leads, and malfunction of IC. The in-circuit inspection is performed with the CPU and the one-chip microcomputer removed from the board. When the in-circuit inspection is completed, the CPU and the one-chip microcomputer are mounted on the board and the function test is performed. In the function test, the control board is actually operated to check whether the output of the electronic circuit board as a whole satisfies the specifications.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11, during the in-circuit inspection of the comparative example, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170, and the power from the in-circuit tester INC passes through the power line a1 and the power line b1. Is supplied to the capacitor CA3. As a result, the capacitor CA3 stores electric charges. However, the electric charge once stored in the capacitor CA3 is not immediately discharged. Therefore, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection is completed, the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 may act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, malfunction may occur in the payout control microcomputer 171.

In short, as a result of mounting the capacitor CA3 as the backup power supply means on the payout control board 170, there is a possibility that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction due to the electric charge remaining in the in-circuit inspection. In particular, the capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor that can store a large amount of electric charge but takes a relatively long time to discharge the electric charge. Therefore, the electric charge is likely to remain in the capacitor CA3, and the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction as described above.

Therefore, the electric circuit DK1 between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of this embodiment is configured as shown in FIG. Note that, in the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 12, description of the portions common to the configuration of the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example shown in FIG. 10 will be appropriately omitted.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by the harness HN3. The connector CN5 at one end of the harness HN3 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN6 at the other end of the harness HN3 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN3 is provided with a wiring H1 for supplying DC5V power (normal power supply) from the power supply unit 190, a wiring H2 for supplying DC5V power different from the normal power supply, and a wiring H3 serving as a ground line. Has been.

On the payout control board 170, a power line A1 and a power line A2 are provided in parallel. The power line A1 is connected to the wiring H1 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6. As a result, normal power is supplied to the power line A1 via the wiring H1. The power line A2 is connected to the wiring H2 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6. As a result, power of DC 5V, which is different from that of the normal power supply, is supplied to the power line A2 via the wiring H2. In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A3 connected to the ground G. The power line A3 is connected to the wiring H3 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A1. With this filter NF1, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied through the power line A1. A capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the power line A1 on the connector CN7 side of the filter NF1. By this capacitor CA1, it is possible to prevent the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large. A capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the power line A1 with respect to the capacitor CA1. With this capacitor CA2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied through the power line A1.

Further, the power line A1 includes a power line C1 extending from the branch portion J1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power source is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, and the power line C1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the normal power source. The power line A1 and the power line C1 correspond to the “first specific power line”.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4. The connector CN7 at one end of the harness HN4 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN8 at the other end of the harness HN4 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN4 is provided with a wiring H4 for supplying normal power and a wiring H5 for supplying backup power.

The power line A1 is connected to the wiring H4 via the connector CN7. The wiring H4 is connected to the power line D1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 through the wiring H1, the power line A1, the wiring H4, and the power line D1. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the normal power supply.

The filter NF2 is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A2. The filter NF2 is similar to the filter NF1 described above. With this filter NF2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from DC5V power (hereinafter also referred to as "charging power") supplied from the power supply unit 190. Note that the charging power is the same DC 5V power as the normal power supply, but is only power for accumulating charges in the capacitor CA3. A resistor T1 similar to the resistor T1 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in series to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the filter NF2. The resistor T1 can suppress the current of the charging power supplied through the power line A2. A diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the resistor T1. With this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the charge accumulated in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) from flowing from the diode DO1 to the connector CN6 side.

A capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the power line A2 on the connector CN7 side of the diode DO1. As a result, when the power is cut off, the backup power can be supplied by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3. A capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the power line A2 on the connector CN6 side of the capacitor CA3. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied through the power line A2.

Further, there is a branch portion J2 on the side of the connector CN7 with respect to the capacitor CA4 in the power line A2. There is a power line B1 extending from the branch portion J2 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and a power line B2 extending to the connector CN7. The power line B1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. This makes it possible to supply the backup power from the capacitor CA3 to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A2 and the power line B1 when the power is cut off. The power line A2 and the power line B1 correspond to the “second specific power line”.

The power line B2 is connected to the wiring H5 via the connector CN7. The wiring H5 is connected to the power line D2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thus, at the time of power interruption, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line A2, the power line B2, the wiring H5, and the power line D2. The portion including the capacitor CA3, the diode DO1, the power line A2, the power line B1, and the power line B2 corresponds to the “backup power supply circuit 179 (see FIG. 6)” of the present embodiment.

As described above, according to the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, in the payout control board 170, the power line A1 and the power line C1 (first specific power line), and the power line A2 and the power line B1 (first 2 specific power lines) respectively extend toward the payout control microcomputer 171 in a separated state. Therefore, it is possible to supply normal power to the payout control microcomputer 171 through the power line A1. Further, it is possible to supply charging power to the capacitor CA3 through the power line A2 and store charges in the capacitor CA3. When the power is cut off, the backup power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line A2 and the power line B1.

Here, during the in-circuit inspection of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls so as to supply power to the power line A1 but not power to the power lines A2 and B1. As a result, it is possible to perform the in-circuit inspection without accumulating electric charges in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, even if the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection is completed, it is possible to prevent the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171. .. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. Note that the other operational effects of the present embodiment are the same as the operational effects of the above-described comparative example, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

5. Explanation of big hit etc. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, there are "big hit" and "off" as a result of the big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). When it is a "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81. In the case of "disappearance", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 81. When the big hit is won, the "big hit game" in which the special winning opening 14 is opened is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (type of big hit). The jackpot game is also called a special game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit games), an opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending after the final round game is finished ( Also referred to as ED). Each round game starts by the end of OP or the end of the previous round game, and ends by the start of the next round game or the start of ED. The closing time (interval time) of the special winning opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, there are roughly two types. Probably strange jackpots and regular jackpots. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that controls the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high-probability state described later. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that controls the gaming state after the jackpot game to a normal probability state (low probability state) described later.

More specifically, the probability variation jackpot and the regular jackpot that can be won in the lottery of the special map 1 (lottery of the first special symbol), the maximum winning opening 14 from 1R to 8R is a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (predetermined) 9R to 16R are jackpots for which the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R (predetermined period). That is, the total number of rounds for these jackpots is 16R, but the actual number of rounds is 8R. The substantial number of rounds is the number of rounds in which game balls can win up to the maximum number of winnings per round (8 in this embodiment). In these jackpots, from 9R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening 14 is extremely short, which is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. In addition, when the "probable variation jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, "special figure 1_probable variation pattern" is stopped and displayed on the first special map display 81a, and when the "normal jackpot" is won, "Special figure 1_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display 81a.

In addition, the probability variation jackpot and the regular jackpot that can be won in the lottery of the special drawing 2 (lottery of the second special symbol) open the special winning opening 14 from 1R to 16R for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (predetermined period). It's a big hit. In other words, these jackpots have a substantial round number of 16R. When the "probable variation jackpot" is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, "special figure 2_probable variation pattern" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display 81b, and when the "normal jackpot" is won, the second "Special drawing 2_normal design" is stopped and displayed on the special drawing display 81b.

Whichever jackpot is won, after the jackpot game, it is controlled to the electric support control state (high base state) described later. The electric support control state continues until the next jackpot win when controlled in accordance with the high probability state. On the other hand, when the control is performed along with the normal probability state (low probability state), the number of power support (time saving number) is set to 100 times. The number of electric support is the upper limit number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol in the electric support control state.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 14, the distribution rates of the jackpots in the lottery of the special diagram 1 and the lottery of the special diagram 2 are both 65% for the probability variation jackpot and 35% for the normal jackpot. However, when the jackpot is won based on the lottery of special figure 1, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is actually executed, while when the jackpot is won based on the lottery of special figure 2, it is substantially The special lottery of the special drawing 2 is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special drawing 1 in that a jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed.

Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine PY1, lottery as to whether or not it is a big hit is performed based on a “big hit random number”, and lottery of the type of the big hit that is won is performed based on a “hit type random number”. As shown in FIG. 15(A), the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. In addition to the jackpot random number and the hit type random number, random numbers acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 include "reach random numbers" and "fluctuation pattern random numbers".

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach is generated in the effect design variation effect showing the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out. Reach is a state in which the effect symbol EZ that is variably displayed among the plurality of effect symbols EZ is the remaining one, depending on which symbol the effect symbol EZ that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7↓7”) in which a combination of effect symbols EZ indicating a big hit is obtained. It should be noted that the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as slightly shaking in the display screen 50a or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255.

The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. Further, the random number acquired based on the passage to the gate 13 includes a normal symbol random number (random number per hit) shown in FIG. 15(B). The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric Chu 12D. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a big hit (whether or not to carry out the big hit game) by using the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is provided corresponding to each set value, as shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F). In the present embodiment, six types of setting values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, or “6” are provided.

The set value is a parameter that determines the probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot determination process (referred to as “jackpot determination probability” or “jackpot winning probability” as appropriate). The set value is set by an employee or the like of the game arcade, as described later. As shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), each of the jackpot determination tables corresponding to each set value has a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. There is a table. Note that the types of set values and the types of jackpot determination tables are not limited to six types, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), jackpot random numbers that are determined to be jackpots or lost are distributed to each jackpot determination table corresponding to each set value. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 uses the jackpot determination table corresponding to the set value to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. In this embodiment, it is set so that the small hit is not won, but it may be set so that the small hit may be won. In addition, the probability of being a big hit and the way of distributing the random numbers of big hits, which are determined to be a big hit, are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), but can be changed as appropriate.

A setting having a setting value of "1" is called "setting 1", a setting having a setting value of "2" is called "setting 2", and a setting having a setting value of "3" is "setting 3". A setting having a setting value of "4" is referred to as "setting 4", a setting having a setting value of "5" is referred to as "setting 5", and a setting having a setting value of "6" is referred to as "setting 6". Also says.

6. Description of gaming state Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special figure display 81 and the general figure display 82 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 have a probability variation function and a variation time reduction function, respectively. A state in which the probability variation function of the special map display 81 is operating is called a "high probability state", and a state in which it is not operating is called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state)". In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16(A) to 16(F), the jackpot determination table used in the high-probability state has a larger jackpot determination table used in the normal-probability state at each set value. It is set so that it can be easily determined as a big hit. Further, in the gaming state of the normal probability state or the high probability state, if the same gaming state, the higher the set value is set, the easier it is to be determined as a big hit.

Further, a state in which the fluctuation time reduction function of the special figure display device 81 is operating is called a “time saving state”, and a state in which it is not operating is called a “non-time saving state”. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time reduction state. That is, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern table that is determined such that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more frequently than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 18). That is, when the variation time reduction function of the special figure display device 81 is activated, a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol than when it is not activated. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure reservation is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting opening is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special figure display 81 may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the public figure display device 82 operate in synchronization with the variation time reduction function of the special figure display device 81. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the universal figure display 82 operate in the time saving state and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-time saving state. In other words, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is greater than the normal symbol hit determination table that is used in the non-time saving state, and the hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed ( See FIG. 17B). In other words, when the probability varying function of the universal figure display 82 is activated, the display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator 82 is higher than that when it is not activated, and the probability that it is an ordinary hit symbol is high. .

Further, in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 7 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 17(C)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, the opening time extension function of the power cable 12D is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the power cable 12D is operating.

In the situation where the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the universal figure display 82, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increasing function of the power cable 12D are operating, compared to the case where these functions are not operating. As a result, the electric ball 12D is frequently opened, and the game ball is frequently won in the second starting opening 12. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these functions are operating is called a "high base state", and a state in which these functions are not operating is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second start opening 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also referred to as an electric support control state or an easy ball entry state. On the other hand, the low base state is also referred to as a non-electric power assist control state or a non-ball entry easy state.

The high base state need not operate all of the above functions. That is, one or more of the functions of the probability change function of the universal figure display 82, the fluctuation time shortening function of the universal figure display 82, the opening time extension function of the electric Chu 12D, and the opening frequency increasing function of the electric Chu 12D are activated. Therefore, it is only necessary that the electric tube 12D be opened more easily than when the function is not operating. Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the probability variation jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "highly accurate and high base state". The high-probability-high base state is ended by a predetermined number of times (10,000 times in the present embodiment) performing variable display of special symbols, or by winning the jackpot and executing the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, the high-probability/high-base state continues substantially until the next big hit. It should be noted that the end condition of the highly accurate high base state may be only that the big hit is won and the big hit game is executed.

In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the regular jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, a low probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly called a "low accurate high base state". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of playing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time saving state, and the low base state. This gaming state is particularly called a "low accurate low base state". The low accurate low base state is referred to as a "normal game state". In addition, a state during execution of the special game (big hit game) will be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state will be referred to as a “privilege gaming state”.

In a high base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by entering the game ball into the right game area 6R (see FIG. 4) by right-handing. The electric support control makes it easier to open the electric Chu 12D than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting opening 12 than to win the first starting opening 11. .. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 13 which is the trigger of the ordinary symbol lottery, the player hits the right ball to win the game ball to the second starting opening 12. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings at the starting opening) rather than hitting left. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the right-handed game is played even during the big hit game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the left game area 6L (see FIG. 4) by left-handing. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric Chu 12D is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 11 than to win the second starting port 12. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-hand hit is performed in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 11. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

7. Game control board unit and method for changing and confirming set value Next, the game control board unit 100B, the method for changing the setting, and the method for confirming the setting will be described in order. First, the game control board unit 100B will be described. 20A is a perspective view of the game control board unit 100B, FIG. 20B is a front view of the game control board unit 100B, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the game control board unit 100B. is there. As described above, the game control board unit 100B includes the game control board 100 and the game control board case 100A.

As shown in FIG. 21, the game control board case 100A includes a lid case 410 that covers the component mounting surface (rear surface) side of the game control board 100, and a bottom case 420 that covers the solder surface (front surface) side of the game control board 100. , Are provided. The game control board 100 is screwed to the lid case 410, and the lid case 410 is assembled to the bottom case 420. In this way, the game control board 100 is housed inside the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 20(A)). After the game control board 100A is housed, the left and right sides of the game control board case 100A are unsealed by caulking pins 430 and 430 (see FIG. 20B).

At the center of the game control board 100 in the left-right direction and in the center of the up-down direction, a game control microcomputer 101 is mounted via an IC socket. Further, a 7-segment display 300 is mounted in the center of the game control board 100 in the left-right direction and in the lower part in the up-down direction (below the game control microcomputer 101). The game control board case 100A is made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate). Therefore, the mounted components such as the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 can be visually recognized from the outside of the game control board case 100A.

A setting key cylinder 180 is mounted on the lower left portion of the game control board 100 (the lower right portion when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the rear). As shown in FIG. 21, the mounting position of the setting key cylinder 180 is a position apart from the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 by a predetermined distance. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted at a distance of about 2 cm from each of the lower edge 100a and the left edge 100b of the game control board 100. In this way, it is necessary to provide a gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 (the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted in an area other than the peripheral edge of the game control board 100). This is so that the connector parts can be mounted according to. That is, if a space in which the connector parts can be mounted is left in the game control board 100 in this manner, when a game machine of a different type (different model) from the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment is manufactured in the future. The connector parts can be easily added to the game control board without significantly changing the wiring pattern of the game control board 100. That is, it is possible to share the wiring patterns (wiring patterns other than connector parts) of the game control board between different models.

The setting key cylinder 180 is a switch component that can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by using a dedicated setting key 184 (see FIG. 20(A)). As shown in FIG. 21, the setting key cylinder 180 includes a rotating portion 183 (inner cylinder, inner cylinder portion) rotatably provided inside the fixed portion 182 (outer cylinder, outer cylinder portion). . The rotating portion 183 is provided with a key hole 185 for inserting the setting key 184.

The setting key 184 is inserted into the key hole 185 of the setting key cylinder 180, and the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is moved from the OFF position (also referred to as the standby position or the initial position, which is shown by the solid line in FIG. 29) to the ON position (rotation position). By turning to a position or a moving position (a position indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 29), a switching circuit (setting key cylinder switch 180a described later, see FIG. 27) in the setting key cylinder 180 is turned on/off. be able to. The state where the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF is referred to as the OFF state of the setting key cylinder 180, and the state where the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON is referred to as the ON state of the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the ON position of the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is a position rotated 90 degrees from the OFF position. Further, the fact that the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the ON position (rotating position) is also referred to as “the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position”, and the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the OFF position (standby). The "position" is also referred to as "the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position".

As shown in FIG. 21, the setting key cylinder 180 has a key insertion side portion 187 having a keyhole surface 186 provided with a keyhole 185, and a lead portion 199 (see FIG. 22) connected to the game control board 100. And a board connection side portion 188. The key insertion side portion 187 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the side of the lid case 410, and is a portion that looks like a substantially columnar shape in FIG. Also, the board connection side portion 188 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the game control board 100 side, and is a portion that looks like a substantially square pole shape in FIG. That is, the key insertion side part 187 is the rear side when the setting key cylinder 180 is divided into two parts in the axial direction, and the board connection side part 188 divides the setting key cylinder 180 into two parts in the axial direction. It is the front side of the case.

Here, the configuration of the setting key cylinder 180 will be described in more detail. 22A is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 20B, and FIG. 22B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 20B. As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the setting key cylinder 180 has a metal fixing member 198 fitted to the outside of the cylinder portion 197 (a portion including the fixing portion 182 and the rotating portion 183). Is. The cylinder portion 197 has a flange portion 197a (in other words, an area of a surface orthogonal to the axial direction of the cylinder portion 197) that is thicker than the diameter of the keyhole surface 186 at a position (substantially the center) in the middle in the axial direction (front-back direction). A flange portion 197a larger than the keyhole surface 186, which corresponds to the "specific portion", is provided. The fixing member 198 is provided with a substantially circular opening (see FIG. 21), and the key hole surface 186 side of the cylinder portion 197 is inserted into the opening. The fixing member 198 is hooked on the flange portion 197a. The connection piece 198a and the connection pin 198b formed on the fixing member 198 are soldered to the game control board 100, and the lead portion 199 extending from the cylinder portion 197 is soldered to the game control board 100. In this way, the setting key cylinder 180 is attached to the game control board 100. The above-mentioned key insertion side portion 187 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 rearward of the fixing member 198 (portion on the lid case 410 side) (see FIG. 21), and the board connection side portion 188 is the setting key cylinder. It is a part of the 180 other than the key insertion side part 187.

Next, the relationship between the setting key cylinder 180 and the game control board case 100A will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, the lid case 410 of the game control board case 100A is provided with an opening 411 for exposing the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 to the outside. When viewed from the rear, the opening 411 has a circular shape with a diameter slightly larger than that of the circular keyhole surface 186 (see FIG. 20B). In the state where the game control board case 100A houses the game control board 100, the key hole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially flush with each other (FIG. 22(A)). (See (B)). The gap L1 between the key insertion side portion 187 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 of the lid case 410 is about 1 mm or less.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22A and 22B, on the inner surface 410b (see FIG. 22) side of the lid case 410 and forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 411 (toward the bottom case 420). A peripheral wall portion 413 extending toward the front is provided. The peripheral wall portion 413 includes an upper wall portion 413a surrounding the opening portion 411, a lower wall portion 413b surrounding the opening portion 411, a left wall portion 413c surrounding the opening portion 411 on the left side, and a right portion of the opening portion 411. It is a rectangular peripheral wall composed of a right wall portion 413d surrounding the other side. The length dimension L2 (see FIG. 22(A)) of the peripheral wall portion 413 in the front-rear direction is about 8 mm, and the thickness L3 (see FIG. 22(A)) of the peripheral wall portion 413 is about 2 mm. In the state where the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounds the board connection side portions 188 of the setting key cylinder 180 up, down, left and right up to the flange portion 197a of the setting key cylinder 180 ( See FIG. 22(A). The gap L4 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the board connection side portion 188 is about 1 mm or less. The gap L5 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the component mounting surface of the game control board 100 is about 5 mm.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control board case 100A is provided with the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounding the periphery of the setting key cylinder 180 according to the shape of the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from shifting due to an external force such as its own weight. As a result, it is possible to keep the connection of the setting key cylinder 180 excellent. If only the prevention of the shift of the setting key cylinder 180 due to its own weight is considered, only the lower wall portion 413b of the peripheral wall portion 413 may be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially on the same plane (see FIG. 22). That is, the keyhole surface 186 does not project or retract with respect to the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 20(A)). Therefore, as compared with the setting key cylinder 180 protruding from the game control board case 100A, a space behind the game control board case 100A can be secured and the setting key cylinder 180 can be prevented from being damaged. Further, as compared with the game control board case 100A retracted, the gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 can be almost eliminated (the opening 411 is blocked by the setting key cylinder 180). Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the game control board case 100A through the opening 411. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud with respect to the setting key cylinder 180 and troubles in the game control board 100.

Particularly in the present embodiment, the opening 411 of the game control board 100 is closed by the setting key cylinder 180, and the peripheral wall portion 413 provided on the game control board 100 surrounds the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180. Are surrounded by almost no space (see FIGS. 20(A) and 22(A)(B)). Therefore, it becomes more difficult to carry out a fraudulent act such as intruding a foreign substance (for example, a wire or a piano wire) through the opening 411 to access the game control microcomputer 101 or the like. Further, since the setting key cylinder 180 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 413, it is assumed that a foreign object (for example, a wire or a piano wire) is allowed to enter the inside of the game control board case 100A from a place other than the opening 411. However, it is possible to suppress contact with the setting key cylinder 180. Further, it is possible to prevent the situation where the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a, which will be described later, is switched due to the influence of incorrect magnetism.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 23, various stickers are attached to the game control board case 100A. In this embodiment, there are four stickers attached to the game control board case 100A: a model name sticker 510, an external terminal information sticker 520, a board management sticker 530, and a seal sticker 540. Each of these stickers is a model information seal indicating information about the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

The model name sticker 510 is a model information sticker in which the model name, manufacturer name, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are described.

The external terminal information sticker 520 is a model information sticker that describes the external terminals of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The external terminal (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a terminal for outputting information from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to an external device such as a hall computer. There are several types of external terminals. Specifically, for example, a prize ball signal indicating information on the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a frame opening signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 2 is open, and special figures 1 and 2 are stopped and displayed. There is a symbol confirmation signal indicating that it has been done, a jackpot signal 1 that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 that indicates that a jackpot game is in progress or a time saving state, and the like. The connector portion of each external terminal is colored with a color different from each other. The correspondence between the color and the signal is described on the external terminal information sticker 520.

The board management seal 530 indicates the management number of the game control board 100 (game control board unit 100B), and when the game control board case 100A is opened for inspection or the like (remove the caulking pins 430 and 430). It is a model information sticker in which the opening column and the opening date of the opening person (when the sealing of the game control board case 100A is released) are provided.

The seal sticker 540 is a model information sticker in which the character of "unopening" indicating that the game control board case 100A should not be opened is described. The seal sticker 540 is affixed to both the lid case 410 and the bottom case 420 while the lid case 410 is locked to the bottom case 420 (that is, with the game control board case 100A closed). There is. Therefore, when the game control board case 100A is opened, the seal 540 is broken. Therefore, by looking at the seal 540, it is possible to know whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. In other words, the seal sticker 540 is a model information sticker that clearly shows whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. Model information stickers (model name label 510, external terminal information label 520, board management label 530) other than the seal 540 are attached to the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 as shown in FIG. It is not affixed across. The sealing sticker may be provided with an IC chip with an antenna, and the ID information stored in the IC chip may be read by a dedicated reader.

Further, the information described on each model information sticker (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530, sealing sticker 540) can be appropriately increased or decreased within a range that does not impair the function of each model information sticker. .. For example, the model name sticker 510 may include information such as rated voltage and rated power. Further, as the model information sticker, all of the model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, the board management sticker 530, and the seal sticker 540 may not be provided. The model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, and the board management sticker 530 according to the present embodiment have various model information and entry fields printed in a predetermined color such as white on a colorless and transparent base portion. .. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inside of the game control board case 100A can be seen to some extent through the seal.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are provided on the left part of the game control board case 100A (the right part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front surface). It is attached. On the other hand, the board management seal 530 and the sealing sticker 540 are attached to the right part of the game control board case 100A (the left part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front surface). More specifically, the model name sticker 510 is the lower left portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower right portion when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front surface), and exposes the setting key cylinder 180. It is attached to the right side of the opening 411 (left side when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front surface). The external terminal information sticker 520 is the upper left part of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper right part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front), and the model name sticker 510 and the opening 411. It is attached above. The board management seal 530 is attached to the upper right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper left portion when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front surface). The sealing seal 540 is attached to the lower right part of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (lower left part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front surface) and below the board management seal 530.

As described above, in this embodiment, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are the left side area of the lid case 410 (the right side area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front side, the first sticker attaching area). 415), the board management seal 530 and the sealing sticker 540 are provided on the right side area of the lid case 410 (the left side area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed as the front side, the second sticker application area 416). It is attached. Then, between the first sticker sticking area 415 and the second sticker sticking area 416 in the lid case 410, there is a non-stick area 417 to which no model information sticker is stuck. The non-stick area 417 is located at a position corresponding to the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 mounted on the game control board case 100A. In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are mounted on the game control board 100 at positions visible from the non-stick area 417. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display device 300 are clearly visible from the non-stick area 417 without the visibility of various model information stickers being impaired. As described above, in this embodiment, the non-stick area 417 functions as a “window portion” that allows both the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display device 300 to be visually recognized. Below, the non-sticking region 417 is also referred to as the common window 417.

Here, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, the model (chip name) of the game control microcomputer 101, the manufacturing number (that is, the information capable of identifying the game control microcomputer 101), these information and the like are coded. The two-dimensional code is printed. Further, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, a model name and a manufacturer name of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and a microcomputer model information sticker 550 on which a two-dimensional code in which these pieces of information are encoded are printed are attached. . From the common window 417, various information shown on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101 can be read visually or by using a code reader.

Further, not only the game control microcomputer 101 but also the 7-segment display 300 can be viewed from the common window 417. As will be described later, the 7-segment display 300 may display a set value or a base. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the set value and the base can be clearly seen from the common window 417. When facing the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A, a distance of at least the model name sticker 510 is open between the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, it is difficult for the 7-segment display device 300 to be hidden by the hand (or arm) that operates the setting key cylinder 180, and the display content of the 7-segment display device 300 is visually recognized. It's hard to happen. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is located outside the information display area 418 including the first sticker sticking area 415, the second sticker sticking area 416, and the common window 417 (specifically, on the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A. When viewed directly, it is arranged in the right side of the information display area 418). Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, the information display area 418 is not easily hidden by the hand (or the arm) operating the setting key cylinder 180, and the visibility of the information display area 418 (that is, the game control microcomputer 101). , The 7-segment display 300, the model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, the board management sticker 530, and the sealing sticker 540 have good visibility).

Next, the 7-segment display device 300 (display means) will be described. Display control of the 7-segment display device 300 is executed by the game control microcomputer 101. The reason why the 7-segment display device 300 is provided on the game control board 100, not on the effect control board 120, for example, is as follows. That is, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) is an inspection target of a test for confirming proper operation. If the display of the set value is controlled by the game control board 100, the set value is This is because reliability can be guaranteed.

As shown in FIG. 24, the 7-segment display unit 300 is a so-called 4-unit 7-segment display (7-segment display unit), and is provided with a total of 32 parts (segments) that are turned on (emits light). Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. Then, the four display areas 310, 320, 330, 340 are provided with eight lighting portions (LED elements, segments) LB1 so that numbers, letters, symbols, etc., from "0" to "9" can be respectively displayed. -LB8, LB9-LB16, LB17-LB24, LB25-LB32. It should be noted that the 4-series 7-segment is a commercial item that is widely distributed in the market, and thus the display means can be configured at low cost by using the 4-series 7-segment (7-segment display 300).

In the present embodiment, any setting value from “1” to “6” is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display device 300. When the set value is displayed, the lighted portions LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340 emit light in a lighting manner (a light emitting manner in which light continues to be emitted) so as to represent the number of the set value. When the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, nothing is displayed in the first display area 310, the second display area 320, and the third display area 330.

Next, a method of changing the set value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode. The transition to the setting change mode can be performed only when the power is turned on. Here, not only the operation for shifting to the setting change mode, but also various operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on will be collectively described. As shown in FIG. 25, there are four types of operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on: a setting change mode transition operation, a setting confirmation operation, a RAM clear operation, and a normal power-on operation.

The setting change mode shift operation (setting change enable operation) is an operation for shifting to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. Specifically, it is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on both the setting key cylinder 180 (setting key switch) and the RAM clear switch 191. By this operation, electric power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on), and the mode after the power is turned on is the setting change mode. The setting change operation and the setting operation in the setting change mode will be described later. The setting change mode ends when the setting is confirmed. As a result, a game mode in which a game can be played (one of non-setting change modes) is set.

The setting confirmation operation is an operation for shifting to the setting confirmation mode (one of the non-setting change modes). The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed by being displayed on the 7-segment display 300. The setting confirmation operation is specifically an operation of turning on the setting key cylinder 180 and turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195). In the setting confirmation operation, the RAM clear switch 191 remains in the OFF state. By such a setting confirmation operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the mode after the power is turned on becomes the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode ends when a fixed time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the game mode in which the game can be played is entered. The setting confirmation mode may be terminated when the setting key cylinder 180 is turned off (the setting key is rotated to the OFF position).

The RAM clear operation is an operation for shifting to the RAM clear mode (one of the non-setting change modes). The RAM clear mode is a mode in which "RAM clear" is performed to initialize a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 101. When the RAM is cleared, the game contents so far are cleared. Even if the RAM is cleared, the setting value information stored in the game RAM 104 is not erased but retained. Further, even if the mode is changed to the RAM clear mode, the setting value cannot be changed and the setting value is not displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Specifically, the RAM clear operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on the RAM clear switch 191. In the RAM clear operation, the setting key cylinder 180 remains in the OFF state. By such a RAM clear operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the RAM is cleared. The RAM clear mode automatically ends when a predetermined process related to RAM clear is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game mode is started in which a game can be played. In this embodiment, the RAM is cleared even when the setting change mode is ended. However, by providing the operation for only clearing the RAM without changing the setting as described above, it is possible to perform only the RAM clear with a smaller work amount than the work amount for changing the setting. ..

The normal power-on operation is an operation for powering on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 without shifting to the setting change mode, shifting to the setting confirmation mode, and clearing the RAM. Specifically, the normal power-on operation is an operation in which both the setting key cylinder 180 and the RAM clear switch 191 remain in the OFF state and the power switch 195 is turned on (the power switch 195 is turned on). . By this operation, electric power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the game mode becomes playable.

In addition, the above-mentioned four operations (setting change mode transition operation, setting confirmation operation, RAM clear operation, normal power-on operation) are generally performed by an employee of the game arcade, and the pachinko game machine PY1 is operated. This is impossible for a player who cannot see the back side (see FIG. 8).

In the present embodiment, as described above, in order to change the set value, it is necessary to satisfy the three conditions (based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition) and then shift to the setting change mode. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 184 is used to set the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position (ON state) rotated by 90 degrees from the standby position (OFF state), and the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed (ON state). ), the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). The reason for providing these three conditions is as follows.

First, the condition that the power is turned on is that an employee of the game arcade can shift to the setting change mode only when the power is turned on. In other words, this is to prevent a situation in which the player or the like can shift to the setting change mode during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, and the set value is changed during the game. Next, the reason for pressing the RAM clear switch 191 is to prevent the game from being started based on the information about the game before the power is turned on, even though the set value is changed. This is because. In other words, if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 will be erased (RAM clear) as will be described later. Therefore, for example, the special figure hold that remains before the power is cut off is determined to be a big hit, but the special figure hold that remains after the power is turned on is determined to be out of sync. It is possible to prevent a situation where a game inconsistency occurs. Finally, the condition that the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position is to confirm the intention of the employee of the game arcade who changes the setting value. That is, the setting change mode is a special mode in which the setting value can be changed, and it is for preventing the setting change mode from shifting to the setting change mode randomly or simply.

Next, a display mode on the 7-segment display device 300 and a mode of performance on the rendering means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, and the panel lamp 54) when changing the set value will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when the setting change mode shift operation is performed to shift to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26(B), in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display unit 300, The set value (for example, "1") that was set before the power was turned on is displayed. That is, the information on the set value set during the previous game is not erased even when the cutoff state is set. Therefore, if the setting change mode transition operation is performed when the power is turned on, based on the stored setting value information (hereinafter referred to as “setting value information”), the setting value set during the previous game is 7 segment. It is displayed on the display device 300. As a result, it is possible to first confirm the current set value (previously determined set value) when the power is turned on.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26(B), the setting screen image SH (mode suggestion image) indicating the characters “setting being changed” is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. To be done. The setting change image SH indicates that the setting value can be changed. By starting the display of the setting change image SH, it is possible to let the employee of the amusement hall who changes the setting value (hereinafter referred to as “setting changer”) to know that the setting change mode has been correctly changed. Is. Further, the setting change image SH continues to be displayed on the display screen 50a until the setting change mode ends. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly understand the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode by the display period of the setting change image SH.

When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26(B), the speaker 620 outputs a voice "mode change sound" (mode suggestion sound). The voice "setting can be changed" indicates that the setting value can be changed. The start of the voice "Setting can be changed" allows the person who has changed the setting to auditorily recognize that the setting has been properly changed. Further, the sound "setting can be changed" is repeatedly output until the setting change mode ends except for the timing of changing the setting value. Therefore, the person who has changed the setting can clearly understand the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he/she hears the voice that “the setting can be changed”.

Further, when shifting to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 26B, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in the special first light emission mode. The light emission in this special first light emission mode suggests that the set value can be changed. By starting the light emission in the first light emission mode, it is possible to let the setting changer know that the setting change mode has been correctly changed. The light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 in the first light emission mode continues until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing of changing the set value. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly understand the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he or she continues to look at the light emission of the first light emission mode.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the setting change mode, not only is the setting change image SH displayed, but also the sound "setting change is possible" is output and the light is emitted in the special first light emission mode. It As a result, the person who has changed the setting can surely grasp the situation in which the set value can be changed both visually and auditorily. As described above, the setting change mode of this embodiment is a complicated operation because it needs to satisfy the three conditions. The setting changer displays the image SH during setting change, and a voice saying "setting can be changed", It is possible to determine whether or not the setting change mode transition operation has been correctly executed depending on whether or not the mode suggestion of the light emission in the special first light emission mode is started.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode. Specifically, every time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is increased by 1 in the order of "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒ "3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6". It is possible to When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value is "6", the set value is returned to "1". Therefore, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is switched one by one, thereby simplifying the method of switching the set value.

The existing RAM clear switch 191 is used as the operating means for switching the set value, and a dedicated operating means is not newly provided. Conventionally, the RAM clear switch 191 is used only to erase the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 when the power is turned on, and is not used except when the power is turned on. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by using the RAM clear switch 191 as an operating means for switching the set value and an operating means for erasing the stored information such as the game RAM 104, the number of parts is reduced. It is possible to

However, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the setting change mode is set, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 are stored at the timing of the pressing operation. This does not mean that the information relating to the payout that has been issued is deleted. This is because the control processing becomes complicated if the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 erase the stored information each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. .. Thus, the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 is not erased while the setting change mode is set, and the control processing of the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 is complicated. To prevent it from becoming.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed after the setting value “1” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the set value “2” is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display unit 300. That is, the display of the set value "1" is switched to the display of the set value "2". This allows the setting changer to know that the setting value has been switched to "2".

Further, as shown in FIG. 26C, on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a set value change image YG (change suggestion image) showing an upward arrow is displayed in an overlapping manner from the setting change image SH. To be done. By displaying the setting value change image YG, it is possible for the setting changer to know that the setting value has been changed (increased). The set value change image YG is displayed for a few seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and then is hidden, and only the setting change image SH is displayed again on the display screen 50a.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26C, the speaker 620 outputs a voice "setting value has been changed". This voice "the setting value has been changed" allows the person who has changed the setting to know that the setting value has been changed. It should be noted that the voice "setting value has been changed" is output only once, and thereafter, the voice "setting can be changed" is repeatedly output as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26C, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emission mode. By the light emission in the second light emission mode, it is possible for the setting changer to know that the setting value has changed. The light emission in the second light emission mode is executed only for a few seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and thereafter, the light emission in the first light emission mode is restored as described above.

Then, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value “2” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. 26C, as shown in FIG. The set value “3” is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the segment display device 300. That is, the display of the set value “2” is switched to the display of the set value “3”. This allows the setting changer to know that the setting value has been changed to "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 26D, the set value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the speaker 620 outputs the voice "the set value has been changed", and the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emission mode. With these, it is possible for the person who has changed the setting to recognize that the setting value has been changed again.

By the way, the person who has changed the setting is basically facing the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (see FIG. 8), and is looking at the 7-segment display 300 when pressing the RAM clear switch 191. Therefore, it is difficult for a person who changes the setting to understand the display of the set value change image YG on the display screen 50a and the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 in the special second light emission mode. Therefore, the display of the set value change image YG and the light emission in the special second light emission mode indicate that the set value has been changed mainly for the employees of the game hall around the pachinko machine PY1. It means to inform (notify). In this way, the employees of the surrounding game arcade can grasp the change of the set value, and thus can grasp that the set value has not been changed illegally.

In particular, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIGS. 26C and 26D, the setting value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a rather than the setting change image SH is displayed (mode suggestion). Is displayed (suggestion of change) with priority. In addition, the speaker 620 gives priority to the output of the voice "setting value has been changed" (change suggestion) over the output of the voice "mode change is possible" (mode suggestion). Further, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 preferentially execute light emission in the special second light emission mode (change suggestion) over light emission in the special first light emission mode (mode suggestion). In this way, by giving priority to the suggestion that the set value has been changed rather than the suggestion that the set value can be changed, in the unlikely event that the set value is illegally changed, employees in the surrounding amusement halls will be changed. It is possible to make the employee more aware of the misconduct.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 26C and 26D, the setting value change image YG does not show the setting value itself to be changed, but is an image simply showing that the setting value has been changed. Also, the voice "setting value has been changed" does not indicate the setting value itself to be changed, but is a voice simply indicating that the setting value has been changed. Thus, in the setting change mode, the setting value is not shown by the rendering means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620, except for the 7-segment display 300 that is mainly viewed only by the person who changes the setting. Therefore, even if the employees in the surrounding game arcade can understand the situation where the set value can be changed and the set value has been changed, they cannot grasp the value itself of the set value. Therefore, even if an outsider such as a player looks at the display screen 50a or listens to the sound from the speaker 620 in the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped.

Next, a method of determining the set value will be described. In order to confirm the set value, it is necessary to rotate the rotating portion 183 of the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotational position (ON position) to the standby position (OFF position) using the setting key 184 in the setting change mode. is there. As a result, the setting change mode ends, and the setting value displayed last in the setting change mode is confirmed. The operation of rotating the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) from the rotation position to the standby position will be appropriately referred to as “setting confirmation operation”.

When the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26(F), on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, a setting value confirmation image SK indicating the characters "setting value has been confirmed" is displayed. . By displaying the set value confirmation image SK, it is possible for the person who has changed the setting or the employee at the surrounding game hall to know that the set value has been confirmed. The set value confirmation image SK is hidden after being displayed for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed.

Further, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the speaker 620 outputs a voice "confirmation of setting value". This voice of "setting value is confirmed" enables the person who has changed the setting or an employee of the surrounding game hall to know that the setting value has been determined. In addition, the voice "setting value is confirmed" is output only once at the timing of the setting confirmation operation.

When the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 26F, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special third light emission mode. By the light emission in the third light emission mode, it is possible to make the person who has changed the setting or the employee of the surrounding game hall know that the set value has been fixed. The light emission in the third light emission mode is executed for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and then ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation operation is performed and the setting change mode ends, the set value displayed in the lighting mode (changeable mode) on the 7-segment display 300 (for example, “shown in FIG. 3”) disappears. That is, the set value is hidden (non-display mode). Then, instead of the 7-segment display device 300, an initial display described later (see FIG. 26F) is executed. In this way, the setting changer can confirm the confirmation of the setting value by changing the setting value displayed in the lighting mode to the non-displaying mode. Furthermore, since the set value is not displayed after the set value is confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult for the confirmed set value to be noticed by the surroundings.

When the set value is thus determined, as shown in FIG. 26(F), as the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 from the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are displayed. (See FIG. 24) lights up. By lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 in this manner, it is possible to easily show the execution of the initial display to the person who has changed the setting and has performed the setting confirmation operation.

The meaning of the initial display on the 7-segment display unit 300 is as follows. The 7-segment display 300 displays the set value as described above, and also displays the base as described later. However, the set value or base displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300 is based on the assumption that the 7-segment display unit 300 is functioning normally, and the 7-segment display unit 300 itself has a failure or a malfunction. Or, there is a possibility that unauthorized modifications have been made.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the initial display is automatically executed on the 7-segment display 300. This allows the person who has changed the setting to recognize that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally. That is, it is possible to confirm that the set value displayed in the setting change mode is the correct value. Furthermore, it is possible to recognize that the base displayed after the initial display will also be displayed correctly. If the mode does not shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on.

By the way, in this embodiment, the setting change mode is configured to be ended before the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is rotated to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. Specifically, at the moment when the setting key 184 starts moving from the rotation position toward the standby position, the setting change mode ends and the set value is fixed. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the setting key cylinder switch 180a provided inside the setting key cylinder 180 and the configuration of the electric circuit around the game control microcomputer 101 will be described, and the determination timing of the set value will be described in detail. To do.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with an input terminal P14 (see FIGS. 28(A)(B)(C)). The input terminal P14 is adapted to input a switch signal of either "H" level (voltage higher than upper limit threshold voltage) or "L" level (voltage lower than lower limit threshold voltage) from the signal line E1. There is. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON by inputting the "H" level switch signal (first signal) from the signal line E1, and the "L" level from the signal line E1. If the switch signal (second signal) is input, it is determined that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF.

The signal line E1 is connected to the terminal s1 of the setting key cylinder switch 180a. A ground line E4 extending from the branched portion Q1 to the ground G of the signal line E1 is provided. A resistor T2 is connected in series to the ground line E4, and the resistor T2 prevents a current from flowing from the signal line E1 toward the ground line E4. In this way, while connecting the signal line E1 extending from the input terminal P14 to the setting key cylinder switch 180a, the ground line E4 is connected at the branch portion Q1 between the setting key cylinder switch 180a and the input terminal P14. ing. The resistor T2 is a pull-down resistor. Therefore, in the signal line E1, the level of the switch signal is set to the “L” level unless DC 5V power is supplied via the setting key cylinder switch 180a.

The setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a terminal s2. A power line E2 is connected to the terminal s2, and DC 5V power is supplied to the power line E2. In FIG. 27, the symbol Vc means that DC5V power is being supplied. The resistor T3 is connected in series to the power line E2. The setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a terminal s3. A ground line E3 extending toward the ground G is connected to the terminal s3.

Here, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a switching piece s4. One end of the switching piece s4 is connected to the terminal s1. On the other hand, the other end of the switching piece s4 can be brought into contact with the terminal s2 or the terminal s3 by the setting changer rotating the setting key 184. Thus, when the setting key 184 is in the standby position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s3 (see the solid line in FIG. 27), and when the setting key 184 is in the rotating position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s2. (See FIG. 28A).

Next, the timing for determining the set value will be described based on FIGS. 28(A), (B), and (C). FIG. 28A is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the rotation position. At this time, the terminals s1 and s2 are in a conductive state, and the DC 5V power supplied to the power line E2 is supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. As a result, the "H" level switch signal is input from the signal line E1 to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101. Thus, while the "H" level switch signal is being input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101, the setting change mode is entered.

Then, the setting changer rotates the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. FIG. 28B is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a at the moment when the setting key 184 starts to rotate from the rotation position. As shown in FIG. 28B, when the switching piece s4 is separated from the terminal s2, the terminals s1 and s2 are brought out of conduction. Therefore, the power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. At this time, since the signal line E1 connected to the input terminal P14 is connected to the ground line E4 at the branch portion Q1, the switch signal switches from "H" level to "L" level. That is, the switch signal of "L" level is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the setting change mode ends and the set value is fixed.

Note that FIG. 28C is a diagram showing the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the standby position. When the setting changer completely rotates the setting key cylinder 180 to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation, the switching piece s4 comes into contact with the terminal s3. At this time, similarly to the above, the DC5V power supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a, so that the switch signal remains at the “L” level.

As can be seen from the above description, the set value determination timing is the timing shown in FIG. 28B, and the setting change mode ends as soon as the setting key 180 starts rotating from the rotation position. Therefore, immediately after starting the setting confirmation operation, the setting changer hides the setting value (for example, the setting value “3” shown in FIG. 26D) displayed on the 7-segment display 300 in the setting change mode. It is possible (see FIG. 26F). In other words, it is possible to make the set value invisible on the 7-segment display 300 before the setting key 184 finishes rotating to the standby position. In this way, by hiding the set value displayed on the 7-segment display device 300 as soon as possible, it is possible to minimize the risk that the set value that has been confirmed is perceived by the surroundings.

When an employee (setting changer) in a busy game hall performs a setting confirmation operation before opening the game hall, the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is properly rotated to the standby position by careless or unfamiliar operation. May not let you However, even if such a situation occurs, the switch signal input to the game control microcomputer 101 is switched from the “H” level to the “L” level (see FIGS. 28A and 28B), so the setting is made. It is possible to confirm the value and hide it. Therefore, even if the setting changer is inadvertently or unfamiliar with the operation, the setting change mode can be ended, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being continuously displayed on the 7-segment display 300. .. Further, with the early timing of ending the setting change mode, the display of the setting change image SH, the output of the voice "Setting change is possible", and the mode suggestion of the light emission in the special first light emission mode are ended. The timing will be early. Therefore, even if the setting key cylinder 180 is not properly rotated to the standby position by an inadvertent or unfamiliar operation, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the setting value can be changed from being continuously suggested.

On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is firmly moved from the standby position (see FIG. 28C) to the rotating position (FIG. 28A). You have to rotate it. That is, when the setting key 184 is rotated halfway from the standby position due to an unfamiliar operation or vibration of a person who changes the setting, the switch signal does not switch from the “L” level to the “H” level (FIG. 28). (See (B)), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode. In this way, the setting value can be changed only when the person who has changed the setting surely rotates the setting key 184 to the rotation position, and it is possible to prevent unintentional transition to the setting change mode as much as possible. is there.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the left of the 7-segment display 300. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged on the right side of the 7-segment display 300 when seen from the person who changes the setting. Further, the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are located below the 7-segment display unit 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 and closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display unit 300 (when viewed from a setting changer). It is arranged on the right side of the setting key cylinder 180). The power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged in parallel along the left-right direction.

When the setting (setting value) is to be changed, a person who has changed the setting first opens the inner frame 21 so that the back side of the inner frame 21 can be touched, and the outer cover 25 is provided to be openable and closable. Open the open/close cover 25a. As a result, the setting key 184 can be inserted into the setting key cylinder 180 mounted on the game control board 100 arranged inside the outer cover 25.

Here, most setting changers try to operate the setting key 184 with their right hand, which is their dominant hand. At this time, if the setting key cylinder 180 is on the left side of the 7-segment display 300 as viewed from the person who changed the setting (that is, from the person who faces the setting key cylinder 180), the right hand of the person who changes the setting (or The right arm) may cover the 7-segment display device 300, and the display content (set value) of the 7-segment display device 300 may be difficult to see.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the person who changes the setting. This prevents the right hand (or right arm) of the person who has changed the setting from covering the 7-segment display 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value displayed on the 7-segment display device 300 from becoming difficult to see. Note that such a positional relationship may cause a situation in which the set value immediately before being confirmed (the set value immediately before being hidden) cannot be seen, and it becomes difficult to know what the set value has been confirmed, particularly during the setting confirming operation. It is effective in preventing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 used for the setting value switching operation is below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180, and seen from the setting changer than the setting key cylinder 180. It is located on the right. Therefore, when the setting changer performs the setting value switching operation with the right hand, which is the dominant hand, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display device 300 when the setting value is switched. Further, since the RAM clear switch 191 is located closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display unit 300, the person who has changed the setting clears the RAM with a few operations using his or her dominant hand (right hand) operating the setting key cylinder 180. The switch 191 can be operated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power switch 195 used for the setting change mode transition operation is also provided at a position closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300, like the RAM clear switch 191. Therefore, it is possible for a person who has changed the setting to operate the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 with a few operations by using the dominant hand (right hand) who operates the setting key cylinder 180. In particular, since the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side at a slight interval, it is easy for a person who changes the setting to operate both the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 at the same time with only one hand. .. Note that the right hand (or right arm) of the person who has changed the setting does not cover the 7-segment display 300 even during the setting change mode transition operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display device 300 when shifting to the setting change mode.

If the above effect is not expected, the RAM clear switch 191 is located below the 7-segment display 300 and closer to the 7-segment display 300 than the setting key cylinder 180 (for example, a pachinko game machine). It may be provided at a position on the left side of the center of the PY1 on the back side in the left-right direction (or at least a position on the left side of the setting key cylinder 180). With such a configuration, the person who has changed the setting can operate the RAM clear switch 191 with the left hand while holding the setting key 184 with the right hand (that is, while the operation of the setting key 184 is on standby). Even in such an operating situation, neither the right hand (or the right arm) and the left hand (or the left arm) are covered by the 7-segment display device 300, so the workability of setting change and the visibility of the 7-segment display device 300 are good. It can be anything.

Subsequently, returning to FIG. 27, the LED driver 350 will be described. The LED driver 350 is integrally incorporated in the 7-segment display 300, and is not mounted on the game control board 100. Thus, by using the general-purpose 7-segment display 300 incorporating the LED driver 350, the space for mounting the LED driver on the game control board 100 becomes unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to control the display of the 7-segment display device 300 while reducing the load of design change on the game control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 27, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a serial data transmission terminal TX3. Further, the LED driver 350 is provided with a serial data receiving terminal RXD. The serial data transmission terminal TX3 and the serial data reception terminal RXD are connected by a serial data line E5. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 can control the driving of the LED driver 350 by transmitting the serial data via the serial data line E5. As a result, it is possible to perform the display control of the set value, the initial display, and the display control of the base described later on the 7-segment display unit 300. In this way, by performing display control by serial communication, it is possible to simplify the wiring on the game control board 100 as compared with the case of performing display control by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the load of design change on the game control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 27, a damping resistor T4 is serially connected to the serial data line E5. The damping resistor T4 can attenuate noise in the serial data line E5. Further, the LED driver 350 is provided with an RST terminal. The reset signal line E6 is connected to the RST terminal. The reset signal line E6 is a line to which a reset signal is transmitted from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, and the capacitor CA5 is connected in parallel to the reset signal line E6. With this capacitor CA5, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reset signal is dropped to the “L” level due to the influence of static electricity or the like, even though the reset signal is at the “H” level.

Next, a case will be described in which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 does not store information indicating setting values (setting value information). The set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (set value information storage means, see FIG. 6) of the gaming RAM 104 each time the set value is selected (changed) in the setting change mode. However, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is shipped (factory shipment) from the production factory, the set value information storage unit 107 does not store the set value information. That is, no set value is set. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the set value information storage unit 107 is a storage area (storage means) provided in the game RAM 104, but is provided separately from the game RAM 104. It may be a storage means that is available.

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on in the state where no set value is set, it is possible to shift to the error mode. Even if no setting value is set, if the setting change mode shift operation is performed, the setting mode is changed to the setting change mode instead of the error mode. The error mode is a mode in which control related to a game cannot be executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and is not released unless the power switch 195 is turned off to shut off the power.

In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30(A), in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB25, LB28, LB29, LB30, LB31 (see FIG. 21) indicate “E”. The light is emitted in an error lighting manner so as to represent the character "." By this light emission, it is possible to let an employee or the like in the game hall know that the error mode has been entered, that is, that the set value has not been set. The light emission (error suggestion) in the error lighting mode continues until the error mode is released by shutting off the power.

Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30(B), the operation suggestion image SE indicating the message "The setting value is not set, please perform the setting change mode transition operation" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Is displayed. By displaying the operation suggestion image SE (error notification), it is possible for the employee or the like at the game arcade to understand the situation in which the set value must be set. The operation suggestion image SE is displayed until the error mode is released by shutting off the power.

When in the error mode, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, as shown in FIG. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30B, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. By outputting these error sounds (error notification) and emitting light in an error light emission mode (error notification), it is possible for an employee or the like of the game arcade to know that the shift to the error mode has occurred. The output of the error sound and the light emission in the error light emission mode are continued until the error mode is released by cutting off the power supply.

Here, in the present embodiment, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is not erased even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on. Therefore, after the factory setting, the setting change mode transition operation is performed to temporarily store the setting value information in the setting value information storage unit 107, and then the setting value information storage unit 107 does not store the setting value information. Does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the error mode is not entered at the next power-on. In short, the transition to the error mode occurs when the setting value has not been set even once and the setting change mode transition operation is not performed when the power is turned on. In this way, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is simply pressed or the power is not turned on (shutdown state), it is possible to unnecessarily shift to the error mode by not erasing the setting value information. It is possible to prevent. The set value information storage unit 107 is composed of a volatile storage unit (DRAM) so as to be able to handle a relatively large number (frequent) accesses, but is, for example, a non-volatile storage unit (EEPROM or the like). It may be configured.

8. Display of Base Next, display of the base will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. In this embodiment, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. The base is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by the player to the number of balls (total number of balls) that is the number of game balls fired by the player. By confirming the base on the 7-segment display device 300, it is possible to understand that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has been tampered with, or has malfunctioned or malfunctioned.

In addition, the base explained in this embodiment means the base in the normal gaming state to the last, the base in the jackpot gaming state, the base in the high probability state and the time saving state, the base in the normal probability state and the time saving state, It does not mean the base from power-on to the present time. In other words, in the present embodiment, the base explained below is the number of balls to be shot by the player in the normal game state (the total number of shot balls), which is the number of balls to be shot by the player in the normal game state. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls). Therefore, the total number of shot balls or the number of prize balls described below means only the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls in the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the base is newly calculated every time the total number of fired balls reaches 60,000. The base information (base information) calculated every time the number of shots reaches 60,000 is sequentially stored in the base information storage unit 108 (see FIG. 6) of the gaming RAM 104. However, the information of the base currently being calculated (hereinafter referred to as “current base”) and the base calculated when the total number of fired balls reaches 60000 before the calculation of the current base (hereinafter “1 time”). Information of "pre-base"), information of base (hereinafter referred to as "twice previous base") calculated when the total number of shots reached 60000 before the previous base, and twice Information up to the base (hereinafter referred to as “three times previous base”) calculated when the total number of fired balls reaches 60000 before the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108. In this way, the 7-segment display unit 300 is based on the information of the current base, the information of the one-time-before base, the information of the two-time-before base, and the information of the three-time-before base stored in the base information storage unit 108. , The current base, the once before base, the twice before base, and the three times before base may be displayed.

The timing of starting display of the base differs depending on whether or not the setting change mode has been entered, that is, whether or not the setting change mode entry operation has been performed. When the setting change mode shifting operation is performed, the setting shift mode is entered after the power is turned on as described above. In this case, the base display is started after the setting change mode ends and the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display unit 300. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without performing the setting change mode transition operation, the base display is started immediately after the power is turned on, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300. In any case, the point that the base display is started after the initial display on the 7-segment display unit 300 remains the same.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), when the initial display is started on the 7-segment display unit 300, the initial display is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment). Then, as the initial display is finished, the current base display is started as shown in FIG. When the current base is displayed here, the current base (for example, “36”) is displayed in two digits (% display) on the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. . Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner (a manner in which light continues to be emitted) as indicated by “bL.”. That is, when the light emission of the lighting mode of "bL." is seen, it means that the base is currently displayed.

The current base display shown in FIG. 31(B) is executed only for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 at the end of the display of the current base, the display of the previous base is started as shown in FIG. 31C. When the previous base is displayed here, the previous base (for example, “37”) is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner as indicated by “b1.”. That is, when looking at the light emission in the lighting mode of "b1.", it means that the previous base is displayed.

The display of the one-time-before base shown in FIG. 31C is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the base information storage unit 108 stores the information of the base two times before at the end of the display of the base one time before, the display of the base twice before is started as shown in FIG. It When the base before twice is displayed here, the base before twice (for example, “35”) is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner as indicated by “b2.”. That is, when looking at the light emission in the lighting mode of "b2.", it means that the base two times before is displayed.

The display of the base before twice shown in FIG. 31D is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment). After that, if the base information storage unit 108 stores the information about the base three times before, the display of the base three times before is displayed as shown in FIG. 31E. Be started. When the base three times before is displayed here, the base three times before (for example, “38”) is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. . Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting manner as indicated by “b3.”. That is, when the light emission of the lighting mode of "b3." is seen, it means that the base three times before is displayed.

The display of the base three times before shown in FIG. 31D is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). Then, the display of the current base is started again as shown in FIG. 31(B) with the end of the display of the base three times before. Thereafter, the current base display shown in FIG. 31(B), the one-time-before base display shown in FIG. 31(C), and the two-time-before base display shown in FIG. The display and the display of the base three times before shown in FIG. 31E are repeatedly executed. Note that the current base, the one-time-preceding base, the two-time-before base, and the three-time-before base are displayed with 1% as the standard unit, but may be displayed with 5% as the standard unit, for example. It is possible.

By the way, FIG. 31C shows the case where the previous base is displayed when the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108. On the other hand, when the base information storage unit 108 does not store the previous base information, the display shown in FIG. 32C is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 32(C), in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display device 300, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 (see FIG. 24) are indicated by “−−”. It emits light in a lighting manner. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner (a manner in which light emission and extinction are repeated) as indicated by “b1.”. In this way, the flashing light emission of "b1." and the display of "---" indicate that the previous base is still undisplayable.

Similarly, when the base information storage unit 108 does not store the information of the previous base twice, as shown in FIG. In the region 340, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in a lighting manner as indicated by "---". Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner as indicated by “b2.”. In this way, the blinking light emission of "b2." and the display of "---" indicate that the second-time base is still undisplayable.

When the base information storage unit 108 does not store the information of the base three times before, as shown in FIG. 32(E), in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display unit 300. , "---", the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in a lighting manner. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner as indicated by “b3.”. Thus, the blinking light emission of "b3." and the display of "---" indicate that the base three times before is still undisplayable. The base information storage unit 108 is configured by a volatile storage unit (DRAM) so as to be able to handle a relatively large number (frequent) accesses, but is configured by, for example, a non-volatile storage unit (EEPROM or the like). It may be done.

9. Transition after power-on Next, the transition after power-on in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described by dividing it into various operations. When the power is turned on, the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). After the power is turned on, it is divided into the following five cases.

First, as a first case, a setting change mode transition operation may be performed. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the mode changes to the setting change mode as described above. When shifting to the setting change mode, the setting change mode does not end unless the setting key 184 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position. When the setting change mode ends, as described above, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display unit 300, and then the base is displayed (see FIG. 31).

In the present embodiment, the operation of shifting to the setting change mode includes pressing the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on. However, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 is not erased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the information related to the game is automatically erased before the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 43) is executed. ing. With this, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted in a state where the information related to the game stored before the power is turned on remains despite the setting value being changed in the setting change mode. When the setting change mode ends, the information related to the game is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 again. Therefore, the person who changes the setting can erase the information related to the game without duplicating the operation. Is possible.

However, when the information related to the game is deleted after the setting change mode ends, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because, if the information related to the game is erased and the set value information is also erased, the set value determined in the setting change mode becomes meaningless. By not erasing the setting value information in this way, the setting value information remains stored even when the power is turned on next time. As a result, it becomes unnecessary for the employee of the game arcade to set the set value again when the same set value as the previous time is sufficient, and it is possible to avoid an increase in the operation load.

As described above, when the setting change mode ends, the game control microcomputer 101 erases the information related to the game. Then, by the main timer interrupt process (S005, see FIG. 43) described later, the process related to the game (game control process from step S101 to step S106) is executed, and the initial display and the base on the 7-segment display 300 are performed. A process related to display (base display process of step S108) is executed.

Next, as a second case, the setting change mode transition operation may not be performed when the power is turned on when the setting value information is not stored. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the error mode is entered as described above. In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the 7-segment display 300 emits light in the error lighting mode so that the 7-segment display 300 displays the character "E". As a result, it is possible to let the employee at the game arcade who sees the character “E” instead of the set value on the 7-segment display 300, knows that the set value has not been set yet. Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 30B, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. This makes it possible to show the transition to the error mode more easily than when the 7-segment display 300 shows the letter "E" on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (see FIG. 8). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a person who turns on the power switch 195 or an employee of the surrounding game hall to recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in a situation where it cannot execute a game. When the error mode is entered, the error mode cannot be released until the power is turned off. Therefore, at the next power-on, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and set the setting value (store the setting value information).

Subsequently, as a third case, the RAM clear switch 191 may be pressed down when the power is turned on while the setting value information is stored. However, in the third case, the setting key cylinder 180 is not rotated to the moving position when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without shifting to the setting change mode. However, even at this time, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because if the setting value information is to be erased, it is necessary to perform a setting change mode transition operation so as not to transition to the error mode at the next power-on, which complicates the operation. Thus, after the information related to the game is erased, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the processing related to the game (the game control processing from step S101 to step S106) by the main timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 43) described later. ) Is performed, and the process related to the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display unit 300 (the base display process of step S108) is performed.

Subsequently, as a fourth case, the setting key 184 may be rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on while the setting value information is stored. However, the fourth case is a case where the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation. In this case, immediately after the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the set value confirmation mode without being changed to the setting change mode. Unlike the setting change mode, the set value confirmation mode cannot select the set value, but is a mode for confirming the set value based on the stored set value information. For example, when the setting value confirmation mode is entered when the setting value information indicating that the setting value is “1” is stored, the fourth display area of the 7-segment display unit 300 is displayed as shown in FIG. 340 emits light to indicate "1". This set value confirmation mode is configured to end when a fixed time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, an employee of the amusement arcade can move to the set value confirmation mode if he/she only wants to confirm which set value it is without erasing (ram clear) the information related to the game when the power is turned on. , It is possible to confirm the current setting value.

The transition to the set value confirmation mode can be considered, for example, in the following cases. During the game by the player, a defect of the image display device 50 or a defect of a movable member (a panel movable member 55k, a frame movable member provided in the gaming machine frame 2, an AT opening/closing member 14k, a power tube opening/closing member 12k, etc.) May occur. In this case, an employee of the game arcade may turn on the power switch 195 and then turn it on again in order to solve the above-mentioned problem. At this time, since the game is suspended, the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power is turned on so as not to erase the information related to the game. However, an employee of the game arcade may want to confirm the set value that has been set. Therefore, in such a case, by setting the setting key 184 to the rotating position when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode and to confirm the set value on the 7-segment display 300. is there. At this time, the set value is displayed only on the 7-segment display 300, and the set value is not suggested by the rendering means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620. This is to prevent the player from grasping the set value. It should be noted that an effect indicating that the setting value confirmation mode is set may be executed by an effect means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620.

When the setting value confirmation mode ends, the game control microcomputer 101 does not basically clear the information related to the game, but performs the process related to the game (step S005, see FIG. 43) by the main timer interrupt process (S005, see below). The game control processing from S101 to step S106) is executed, and the processing related to the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300 (the base display processing of step S108) is executed. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (stored) at the time of power interruption do not match before executing the processing related to the game, exceptionally Information relating to the game is cleared, assuming that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are abnormal.

Finally, as a fifth case, there is a case where the power switch 195 is simply switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation while the setting value information is stored. That is, in the fifth case, the setting key 184 is not rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed. In this case, the setting change mode or the set value confirmation mode will not be entered after the power is turned on. Therefore, as soon as the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 does not basically clear the information related to the game, executes the process related to the game, and displays the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display unit 300. Perform the processing. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the gaming RAM 104 and the checksum of the gaming RAM 104 stored at the time of power interruption do not match before executing the processing related to the gaming, the gaming related exceptionally relates to the gaming. Information is cleared.

10. Symbol setting suggesting effect and high setting suggesting effect In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the display screen of the image display device 50 is reduced in order to reduce the possibility that the set value is grasped by the surroundings as much as possible. No image indicating the set value is displayed on 50a. However, even if the setting change mode is ended, if the image suggesting the setting value is not displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 at all, the setting value is set for the player who is playing the game. It will not be possible to provide an entertaining property that makes people guess. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the setting change mode is finished, the symbol setting suggesting effect or the high setting suggesting effect may be executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 to provide the player with amusement. Is possible.

First, the symbol setting suggesting effect will be described. The symbol setting suggesting effect is an effect that suggests the set value set by any of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, or the right effect symbol EZ3, when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. is there. The left effect symbol EZ1 means the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the left effect symbol display area on the left side of the display screen 50a. Further, the medium effect symbol EZ2 means the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the medium effect symbol display area in the center of the display screen 50a. The right effect symbol EZ3 means the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the right effect symbol display area on the right side of the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 33, the effect symbol EZ has a display mode in which a portion indicating a number (number portion) and a portion indicating a character are combined, and there are nine types of effect symbol EZ. In the following, the effect symbol EZ in which the numeral portion is "1" is referred to as the first effect symbol EZa, the effect symbol EZ in which the numeral portion is "2" is referred to as the second effect symbol EZb, and the numeral portion is "3". A certain production symbol EZ is called a third production symbol EZc, a production symbol EZ whose number portion is "4" is called a fourth production symbol EZd, and a production symbol EZ whose number portion is "5" is a fifth production symbol EZe. The production symbol EZ in which the numeral portion is “6” is called the sixth production symbol EZf, the production symbol EZ in which the numeral portion is “7” is called the seventh production symbol EZg, and the numeral portion is “8”. A certain effect symbol EZ will be referred to as an eighth effect symbol EZh, and an effect symbol EZ whose numeral portion is "9" will be referred to as a ninth effect symbol EZi.

The symbol setting suggestive effect is executed when the determination of the big hit is a loss. In this case, among the three effect symbols EZ (left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3) that are stopped and displayed, using the lost effect symbol effect lottery tables shown in FIGS. 34(A) to (F). One effect symbol EZ is determined. The loss effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 29A to 29F are provided according to the set values. Therefore, among the loss effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 34(A) to (F), a table corresponding to the set value set at the present time is used. As shown in FIGS. 34(A) to (F), among the first effect symbol EZa to the ninth effect symbol EZi, the effect symbol EZ corresponding to the set value is selected by lot as compared with the other effect symbols EZ ( Various loss effect design lottery tables are set so that the distribution ratio) becomes higher. It is to be noted that the effect symbol EZ determined in the various lost effect symbol design lottery tables is determined by a lottery as to which of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3. The remaining two effect symbols EZ other than the effect symbol EZ determined in the lost effect symbol lottery table are determined by lottery using the effect symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern.

As described above, for example, when the set value is set to "6", when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the losing stop mode, which one of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is displayed. The frequency with which the sixth effect symbol EZf is increased. That is, when the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 35(B) after the variation effect is started as shown in FIG. 30(A), It becomes easy for any of the three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 to be stopped and displayed as the sixth effect symbol EZf. As a result, the player is required to know a relatively large number of stop displays of the sixth effect symbol EZf, and it is possible to infer that the set value is "6". In other words, it is possible to let the player pay attention to which effect symbol EZ is frequently stopped and displayed even if the player loses the game, and it is possible to provide a novel gaming interest.

Next, the high setting suggestive effect will be described. The high setting suggesting effect is an effect that suggests that the setting value is a high setting of "4" or "5" or "6" when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed due to SP reach loss. This high setting suggestion production may be executed only when the set value is set to "4", "5" or "6", and the set value is "1" or "2" or "3". If it is set to "", it is not executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the set value is “4”, “5”, or “6” at the stage when the player has grasped the execution of the high setting suggestion effect.

Here, the high setting suggestive effect of the present embodiment is a condition that the SP reach is lost, and the number of shot balls after the power is turned on is a multiple of 10,000 shots such as 10,000 shots, 20,000 shots, 30,000 shots, 40,000 shots, 50,000 shots, and 600,000 shots. It is executed when the conditions that have been reached are met. The condition of SP reach loss is provided in order to maintain the player's motivation by executing a high setting suggestion effect to a player who is greatly disappointed by SP reach loss. Further, the condition that the number of shot balls has reached a multiple of 10,000 shots is provided in order to make the high setting suggestive effect a privilege that can be executed on an extremely rare occasion.

Specifically, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. That is, after reaching, the battle effect is executed as SP reach as shown in FIG. 36(A). In FIG. 36(A), as a battle effect, a battle image BT showing that the main character and the rival character fight in baseball is displayed on the display screen 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the battle defeat effect is executed as SP reach loss. In FIG. 36(B), as a battle defeat effect, a battle defeat image BH indicating that the hero character has been defeated by the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 36(C), the effect symbol EZ (left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3) is stopped and displayed in a lost manner (for example, "191"). In this way, with the player being aware of the SP reach loss, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 36(D), a phoenix bird image FT (implication effect image) indicating that a phoenix fly and appears is displayed on the display screen 50a as the high setting suggestion effect. As a result, the player who sees the phoenix image FT is made aware of the setting value of "4", "5", or "6", and forgets the disappointment of SP reach loss. It is possible to give a feeling of elation.

11. Control Operation of Pachinko Gaming Machine Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described based on FIGS. 37 to 47, and the operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described based on FIGS. 48 to 56. First, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described.

[Main Control Main Processing] The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 37 from the game ROM 103 when the power is turned on. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 are provided in the game RAM 104. The initial value of the counter is “0”, the initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, and the initial value of the status is “1”.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the main control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) described later is performed. Following the power-on process (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process is executed (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S003), the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 15 are incremented by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S003) is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, for example, it is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main-side timer interrupt process (S005) is finished, until the next main-side timer interrupt process (S005) is started, various counters by normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S003) The value update process is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after interrupt enable (S004) is performed.

[Power-On Process] As shown in FIG. 38, in the power-on process (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets access permission to the game RAM 104 (S009). As a result, it becomes possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 104. Next, the set value designation command for notifying the set value information (set value information) stored in the set value information storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S010). . As a result, the effect control board 120 receives the set value designation command when the power is turned on, so that the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the set value set in the previous game. However, in the process of step S010, if the setting value information is not yet stored in the setting value information storage unit 107, the game control microcomputer 101 does not transmit the setting value designation command.

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (ON state) (depressed) and the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (ON state) (S011). That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode shifting operation is being executed. If the setting change mode shifting operation has been executed (YES in S011), the process proceeds to step S013 via the setting change mode process (S012) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S011 that the setting change mode transition operation has not been executed (NO in S011), then it is determined whether or not the setting value information is stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 (S016). ). If the set value information is not stored (NO in S016), it means that the set value has not been set even once, and the process proceeds to an error mode process (S021) described later. On the other hand, if the setting value information is stored (YES in S016), it is next determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (S017). In short, the process of step S017 is a process of determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 has been pressed, although the setting change mode has not been entered. If the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (YES in S017), the process proceeds to step S013.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 191 is not ON (NO in S017), then it is determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (S018). In short, the process of step S018 is a process of determining whether or not the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position although the setting change mode is not entered. If the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (YES in S018), a setting value confirmation mode process described later is executed (S019), and the process proceeds to step S020. On the other hand, if the setting key cylinder switch 180a is not ON (NO in S018), it means that the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed and the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotating position when the power is turned on. In this case, the process proceeds to step S020 without executing the setting confirmation mode process of step S019. When the process proceeds to step S020, a process at the time of restoration from an electric power failure described below is executed, and the process proceeds to step S022.

In step S013, the information stored in the game RAM 104 is cleared (S013). However, at this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 and the information about the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of shot balls, information on the total number of prize balls, 1 Pre-base information, pre-base information, pre-base information) will not be cleared.

Thus, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the set value information is not cleared, so that the game can be restarted at the set value that was set before the power failure. That is, it is possible to play the game without shifting to the setting change mode and setting the setting value each time the power is turned on. In addition, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the information related to the base is not cleared, so that the same base as before the power failure was displayed on the 7-segment display 300, the previous base, the previous base, and the previous two times. It is possible to display the base and the base three times before.

When the setting change mode shifting operation is performed, YES is determined in step S011 and the process proceeds to step S012. In this case, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 in step S013 is not cleared unless the setting change mode process in step S012 is completed. In short, when performing the setting change mode transition operation, it is possible to clear the game information stored in the game RAM 104 after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, when the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotation position when the power is turned on, but the RAM clear switch 191 is being pressed, a YES determination is made in step S017 and the process proceeds to step S013. Become. In this case, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared immediately after the power is turned on.

After step S013, the game control microcomputer 101 initializes the work area of the game RAM 104 (S014). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. Subsequently, a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are cleared is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S015), and the process proceeds to step S022. In step S022, as other power-on processing, for example, setting of the game CPU 102, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for interrupt time management), and the like are performed, and this processing ends.

[Setting Change Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 39, in the setting change mode processing (S012), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets the setting for notifying the effect control board 120 of the shift to the setting change mode. Send the mode change command (S030). Then, it is determined whether the set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (S031). If the set value information is stored (YES in S031), since the set value has been set before the power failure, the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information (S032) (Fig. 26(B)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for displaying the set value from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. In this way, the setting changer can grasp the set value set before the power interruption on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after performing the setting change mode shifting operation.

In step S033, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 191 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed in the setting change mode. If it is ON (YES in S033), new setting value information is stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 to advance the setting value by one (S034). When the setting value is "6" and the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the setting value information indicating that the setting value is "1" is stored. Then, the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the new set value information (S035) (see FIGS. 26C and 26D). As a result, it is possible for the person who has changed the setting to recognize that the setting value has been increased.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the effect control board 120 a set value change command for notifying that the set value has been changed (S036), and advances the set value by one. A setting value designation command for notifying information (setting value information) is transmitted (S037), and the process proceeds to step S038. In step S038, it is determined whether the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. If it is not OFF (NO in S038), it is not the timing to end the setting change mode yet, and the process returns to step S033. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S038), a setting mode end command for notifying the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S039). Then, a setting value designation command (confirmation setting information) for notifying the information of the confirmed setting value (setting value information) is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S040). Further, the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is set to the non-display mode (S041), and the process proceeds to step S013 (see FIG. 38) described above. Thus, as soon as the setting key cylinder switch 180a is turned off, the set value cannot be seen on the 7-segment display 300, and it is possible to make it difficult for the surroundings to grasp the set value. The processing after step S013 has been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, there are three timings at which the setting value designation command including the setting value information is transmitted to the effect control board 120. The first timing is the timing of transmitting the setting value designation command by the processing of step S010 when the power is turned on. The second timing is the timing of transmitting the setting value designation command by the processing of step S037 when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode. The third timing is a timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted by the processing of step S040 when the setting value is confirmed with the end of the setting change mode.

As described above, by limiting the number of timings at which the setting value designation command is transmitted to only three, it is possible to reduce the risk that the setting value information is illegally acquired outside. That is, the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing described above are until the process related to the game (the game control process from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 43) is started after the power is turned on. It is a timing that does not occur after the game is started. Thus, the setting value designation command is not transmitted from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 during business hours (mainly during the game), and the setting value is illegally grasped by skimming for the setting value designation command. It is possible to reduce the risk of being caught as much as possible.

[Set Value Confirmation Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 40, in the set value confirmation mode processing (S019), the game control microcomputer 101 first displays the set value on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information ( S050). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a fixed time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the set value was started on the 7-segment display device 300. If it has not elapsed (NO in S051), the process of step S051 is repeated, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 300 continues. On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S051), the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is set to the non-display mode (S052), and step S020 described later (see the process at the time of power interruption recovery in FIG. 38 is referred to. ). As described above, in the set value confirmation mode process (S019), unlike the above-described setting change mode process (S012), the set value is not changed, and the present set value is simply displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Only.

[Electric Power Loss Recovery Processing] As shown in FIG. 41, in the power interruption recovery processing (S020), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the power interruption flag is ON (S060). The power failure flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of power failure, and is a flag that is turned on in the power failure monitoring process (see FIG. 47) described later. If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S060), there is a possibility that the power has not been shut down normally, so the flow proceeds to step S065.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S060), the checksum of the gaming RAM 104 is calculated (S061), and the checksum of the gaming RAM 104 stored (stored) at the time of power interruption ( 47) (see step S161 in FIG. 47) is determined (S062). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S062), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are abnormal, and the flow proceeds to step S065. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S062), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 104 are normal, and the flow proceeds to step S063.

In step S063, the setting management of the work area of the game RAM 104 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, power recovery information is read from the game ROM 103, and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag (S064), and proceeds to step S022 (see FIG. 38) described above. The processing after step S022 has been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in step S065, the information stored in the game RAM 104 is cleared. At this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 and the information about the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of shot balls, information on the total number of prize balls, once) Information on the previous base, information on the previous base, and information on the third previous base) will not be cleared. However, when the process proceeds to step S065, there is a possibility that the power is not shut off normally, or there is a possibility that the contents stored in the gaming RAM 104 are abnormal because the checksum values do not match. .. Therefore, instead of the process of step S065, the setting value information and the information related to the base may be cleared. In this case, after clearing the set value information, set value information indicating "1" as the set value of the initial value may be newly stored in the set value information storage unit 107. In the process of step S065, if the power cut flag set in the game RAM 104 is ON, the power cut flag is turned OFF.

After step S065, the work area of the game RAM 104 is initialized (S066). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the effect control board 120 a RAM clear notification command for notifying the clearing of the storage contents of the game RAM 104 (S067), and the above step S022 (see FIG. 38). ).

[Error Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 42, in the error mode processing (S021), the game control microcomputer 101 first displays “E” in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 (FIG. 30(A)). The error display process for indicating the character of () is executed (S080). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for indicating the character "E" from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. As a result, in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display device 300, light is emitted in the error lighting mode so as to represent the character “E”. In this way, by showing the character "E" on the 7-segment display device 300, it is possible for the employee of the game arcade to know the shift to the error mode.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits an error command for notifying the shift to the error mode to the effect control board 120 (S081). After that, the loop processing is performed without returning to the power-on processing (S001, see FIG. 33). In this way, when the error mode is entered, the error mode continues until the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is turned on next time, the game cannot be started unless the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting value is set.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] The game control microcomputer 101 repeats the main-side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 43 every short time such as 4 msec. First, the game control microcomputer 101, jackpot random number used in jackpot lottery, hit type random number for determining the type of jackpot, reach random number for determining whether or not to reach in the production symbol variation production, to determine the variation pattern The random pattern updating process of updating the variation pattern random number, the normal symbol random number (per random number) used for the normal symbol lottery, etc. is performed (S101). Note that at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC. When all the random numbers are hardware random numbers, the process of updating the random numbers by software is not necessary. Further, the random number generation circuit may be built in the game control microcomputer 101.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs input processing (S102). In the input process (S102), various sensors (first starting opening sensor 11a, second starting opening sensor 12a, gate sensor 13a, big winning opening sensor 14a, general winning opening sensor 10a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. , A detection signal detected by the outlet sensor 18a (see FIG. 6) is read, and a prize ball command for paying out a prize ball according to the type of the winning opening is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a starting opening sensor detection process (S103), a special operation process (S104), and a normal operation process (S105). In the starting opening sensor detection process (S103), if there is a winning detection by the first starting opening sensor 11a or the second starting opening sensor 12a, it is confirmed that there are less than four pending memories corresponding to the starting opening with the winning detection. A random number such as a jackpot random number (a jackpot random number, a hit type random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number (see FIG. 15A)) is acquired as a condition. In addition, if there is passage detection by the gate sensor 13a, the normal symbol random number (see FIG. 15B) is acquired on condition that the number of ordinary symbols is less than four.

In the special operation process (S104), the jackpot determination table based on the set value indicated by the set value information (see FIGS. 16A to 16F) is used for the random number such as the jackpot random number acquired in the starting opening sensor detection process (S103). ), a hit type determination table (see FIG. 14), a reach determination table (see FIG. 17A), and a special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18). Note that the jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit using the jackpot determination tables shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F corresponds to “a determination process performed based on a ball entering the ball entrance”. Then, the special symbols for displaying the result of the jackpot lottery are displayed (variable display and stop display). At the time of displaying this special symbol, the variation start command including the information of the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Then, as a result of the determination of the jackpot random number, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which the jackpot 14 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (opening time and number of times of opening, see FIG. 14) according to the type of jackpot (Special game) At the time of executing this jackpot game, an opening command including information on the type of the winning jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In the special operation process (S104), when the random number such as the jackpot random number is not stored, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the customer waiting standby command for executing the customer waiting production.

In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol random number acquired in the starting mouth sensor detection process (S103), the normal symbol hitting determination table (see FIG. 17B) are used for determination, and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table (See FIG. 17(C)) is used to select the variation time of the normal symbol according to the game state. Then, a normal symbol display (variable display and stop display) for notifying the determination result of the universal drawing lottery is performed. As a result of the determination of the normal symbol random number, if the normal winning symbol is won, an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 12D in accordance with a predetermined opening pattern (opening time and opening times, see FIG. 19) according to the game state To do.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an output process of outputting the command or the like set in each process described above to the effect control board 120 or the like (S106). Then, the base calculation process (S107), the base display process (S108), and the power-off monitoring process (S109), which will be described later, are executed, and this process ends.

[Base Calculation Process] As shown in FIG. 44, in the base calculation process (S107), the game control microcomputer 101 first executes a shot ball count process (S110). In the firing ball number counting process (S110), the value of the firing ball number counter provided in the game RAM 104 is increased based on the detection signal from the outlet sensor 18a. However, in the present embodiment, since the base in the normal game state is calculated, the value of the firing ball number counter is increased only in the normal game state. Next, it is determined whether the number of shot balls is a multiple of 10,000 shots, that is, whether the value of the number of shot balls is a multiple of 10,000 such as 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, 40,000, 50,000, or 60,000 (S111). ). If it is not a multiple of 10000 shots (NO in S111), the process proceeds to step S113. On the other hand, if it is a multiple of 10,000 shots (YES in S111), a setting suggestion condition satisfaction command for notifying the effect control microcomputer 121 that the number of shot balls has become a multiple of 10,000 shots is set in the game RAM 104. (S112).

Succeedingly, in a step S113, a total prize ball number counting process is executed. In the total prize ball count processing (S113), the game RAM 104 is provided based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 11a, the second starting opening sensor 12a, the special winning opening sensor 14a, and the general winning opening sensor 10a. The value of the total prize ball count counter is increased by a value corresponding to the prize ball count. However, in this embodiment, since the base in the normal game state is calculated, the value of the total prize ball counter is increased by a value according to the prize ball number only in the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting opening 11 is “3”, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting opening 12 is “1”, and the number of winning balls for the large winning opening is “3”. 10" and the number of prize balls for the winning in the general winning opening 10 is "5", but the number of these prize balls can be appropriately changed.

Then, the current base calculation process is executed (S114). In the present base calculation process (S114), the present base (%) is calculated by dividing the value of the total prize ball number counter by the value of the number of shot balls counter and multiplying by 100. Then, the calculated current base information (current base information) is stored in the base information storage unit 108.

After step S114, it is determined whether the number of fired balls has reached 60,000, that is, whether the value of the number of fired balls counter is 60,000 or more (S115). If the number has not reached 60,000 (NO in S115), this process ends. On the other hand, if the number has reached 60000 (YES in S115), the base information stored in the base information storage unit 108 is shifted and stored (S116).

Specifically, if the base information before the third time (base information before the third time) is stored, the base information before the third time is cleared. Further, if there is storage of the base before the second time (base information before the second time), the base information before the second time is stored as the base information before the third time. Further, if there is storage of the base information before one time (base information before one time), the base information before one time is stored as base information before two times. The current base information (current base information) is stored as the previous base information.

After step S116, the value of the firing ball number counter is cleared (S117), the value of the total prize ball number counter is cleared (S118), and this processing is ended. Thus, every time the number of fired balls reaches 60,000, the number of fired balls and the total number of prize balls are reset, and the current base calculation is performed.

[Base Display Process] As shown in FIG. 45, in the base display process (S108), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the initial display end flag is ON (S120). The initial display flag is a flag indicating that the initial display on the 7-segment display unit 300 is completed. If the initial display end flag is not ON (NO in S120), the initial display process for executing the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S121). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the LED driver 350 serial data for lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 of the 7-segment display 300 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27). .. In this way, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display unit 300, so that it is confirmed that the 7-segment display unit 300 itself has not been broken or malfunctioned or tampered with. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the initial display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S122). If the time has not elapsed (NO in S122), the present display is ended in order to continue the initial display on the 7-segment display unit 300. On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S122), it is the timing to end the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, and the base display flag is currently set to ON (S123). The current base display flag is a flag indicating that the current base is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300. After step S123, the initial display end flag is turned on (S124), and this processing ends.

If the initial display flag is ON in step S120 (YES in S120), the process proceeds to step S125, and it is determined whether or not the base display flag is currently ON (S125). If the current base display flag is ON (YES in S125), the current base display process for displaying the current base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S126). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "bL." in the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and the third display. The serial data for displaying the current base in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. Thus, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the base can be grasped at present with the 7-segment display device 300, and it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is out of order, defective, or improperly modified. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the current base display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S127). If the time has not passed (NO in S127), the present base is still displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S127), it is the timing to end the display of the current base on the 7-segment display unit 300, and the previous base display flag is turned ON (S128). The once before base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the once before base is reached. After step S128, the current base display flag is turned off (S129), and this processing ends.

If the base display flag is not currently ON in step S125 (NO in S125), the process proceeds to step S130 shown in FIG. 46, and it is determined whether or not the previous base display flag is ON. If the previous base display flag is ON (YES in S130), it is subsequently determined whether or not the previous base information is stored in the base information storage unit 108 (S131). If there is a memory (YES in S131), the one-time-preceding base display process for displaying the one-time-before base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S132). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b1." in the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and the third display. The serial data for displaying the previous base once in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, the 7-segment display 300 can grasp not only the current base but also the base one time before, as shown in FIG. 31(C), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be broken or malfunctioned or illegally modified. It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not it is applied.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S131 that the previous base information is not stored (NO in S131), the previous base non-display process is executed (S134). In this one-time-before base non-display process (S134), the game control microcomputer 101 uses the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to display "b1" in a blinking manner in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. Is displayed, and serial data for displaying “−−” in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32(C), the 7-segment display 300 cannot yet grasp the previous base.

Then, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous-time base display process (S132) or the previous-time base non-display process (S134). ). If the time has not passed (NO in S135), the one-time-preceding base display processing (S132) or the one-time-preceding base non-display processing (S134) is continued, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S135), the second previous base display flag is turned ON (S136). The second-time base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the second-time base is reached. After step S136, the previous base display flag is turned off (S137), and this processing ends.

In step S130, if the previous base display flag is not ON (NO in S130), the process proceeds to step S138, and it is determined whether or not the second base display flag is ON. If the second-time base display flag is ON (YES in S138), it is subsequently determined whether or not the second-time base information is stored in the base information storage unit 108 (S139). If there is a memory (YES in S139), the 2nd before base display process for displaying the 2nd before base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S140). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b2." in the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base twice in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. Thus, in the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base and the one-time-before base but also the two-time-before base can be grasped as shown in FIG. 31(D), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is out of order. Alternatively, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not unauthorized modification has been made.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S139 that the previous base information is not stored (NO in S139), the second previous base non-display process is executed (S141). In this second-time base non-display process (S141), the game control microcomputer 101 uses the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to display "b2" in a blinking manner in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. Is displayed, and serial data for displaying “−−” in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the 7-segment display unit 300 cannot yet grasp the base twice before.

Then, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the second-time base display process (S140) or the second-time base non-display process (S141). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S142), the present processing is ended in order to continue the previous-second base display processing (S140) or the second-pre-base non-display processing (S141). On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S142), the three-time base display flag is turned ON (S143). The 3rd previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 3rd previous base is reached. After step S143, the previous base display flag is turned off (S144), and this processing ends.

In step S138, if the second previous base display flag is not ON (NO in S138), the process proceeds to step S145 to determine whether the third previous base display flag is ON. In step S145, it is not substantially determined that the three-time base display flag is not ON. That is, when the process proceeds to step S145, the three-time base display flag is ON, so the process always proceeds to step S146. In step S146, it is determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the previous base information three times. If there is a memory (YES in S146), the 3rd previous base display process for displaying the 3rd previous base on the 7-segment display 300 is executed (S147). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b3." in the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27), and the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base three times in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, the 7-segment display 300 can grasp not only the current base, the one-time-before base and the two-time-before base, but also the three-time-before base as shown in FIG. 31E, and the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there is a failure, malfunction, or unauthorized modification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S146 that the base information before three times is not stored (NO in S146), the base non-display processing for three times before is executed (S148). In the base non-display process 3 times before (S148), the game control microcomputer 101 uses the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to display “b3” in the blinking manner in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. Is displayed, and serial data for displaying “−−” in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32(E), the 7-segment display unit 300 cannot yet grasp the base three times before.

Then, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the third-time base display process (S147) or the third-time base non-display process (S148) (S149). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S149), the present processing is ended in order to continue the base display processing for three times before (S147) or the base non-display processing for three times before (S148). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S149), the base display flag is currently turned ON (S150). As a result, in the next base display process (S108), the display of the current base is started on the 7-segment display unit 300. After step S150, the previous base display flag is set to OFF (S151), and this processing ends.

[Power-off monitoring process] In the power-off monitoring process (S109), as shown in FIG. 47, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S160), and it must be input. If (NO in S160), this process ends. The power-off signal is a signal output from the power supply unit 190 when the voltage of the monitored power supply (for example, DC24V) is not detected for a predetermined period (for example, 25 ms). If the power-off signal is input (YES in S160), the checksum is calculated and stored in the gaming RAM 104 (S161), and the power-off flag is turned on (S162). Then, the prohibition setting of access to the gaming RAM 104 is made (S163). This makes it impossible to write or read information to or from the gaming RAM 104. After that, the loop processing is performed without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 43).

In parallel with the above processing in the game control microcomputer 101, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the processing shown in FIGS. 48 to 56. The operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described below.

[Sub-control main process] The effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out and executes the program of the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 48 from the effect ROM 123 when the power is turned on. The counter, the timer, the flag, the status, the buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the sub-control main processing, it is determined whether the sub-side power-off flag (a flag that is turned on at the time of power-off) is ON and the contents of the effect RAM 124 are normal (S1001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the effect RAM 124 are not normal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, the effect RAM 124 After initialization (S1002), the process proceeds to step S1003.

On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S1001 is YES, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag has been turned on due to the power interruption but the contents of the effect RAM 124 are normally maintained, then the RAM is cleared. It is determined whether the notification command is received (S1011). If the RAM clear notification command is received (YES in S1011), the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 has been cleared. Therefore, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is cleared (S1002), and the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1003 without clearing the effect RAM 124.

Here, in the process of step S1002, when the effect RAM 124 is cleared, the information of the set value flag 125 described later is also cleared (erased). The set value flag 125 is for the effect control microcomputer 121 to grasp the set value as information on the effect side (sub side). Therefore, when the power is turned on, if the effect control microcomputer 121 clears the effect RAM 124, the setting value information is also cleared.

In step S1003, other initial settings are performed. In other initial settings, for example, the setting of the effect CPU 122, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like are performed. If the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S1004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S1005). In the random number seed update process (S1005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The random numbers for effect determination include random numbers for effect symbol determination for determining effect symbols, random numbers for determining variable effect pattern for determining variable effect patterns, and random numbers for predictor effect determination for determining various notice effects. Etc. The method of updating the random number can be the same method as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added not by one, but by two. This is the same in the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S1005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S1006). In the command transmission process (S1006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 140 uses the image display device 50 to execute various effects (variation effect, jackpot effect including opening effect, round effect, and ending effect). The production control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits interrupts (S1007). After that, steps S1004 to S1007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the reception interrupt process (S1008), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S1009) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010) can be executed.

[Reception Interrupt Processing] In the reception interrupt processing (S1008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned on, that is, the strobe signal sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. And the other interrupt processing (S1009, S1010) is executed in priority. As shown in FIG. 49, in the reception interrupt process (S1008), various commands transmitted from the game control board 100 are stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1101).

[1 ms timer interrupt process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S1009) is executed each time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 50, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S1009), first, the input process is performed (S1201). In the input process (S1201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on detection signals from the input section detection sensor 40a (see FIG. 7) and the select button detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7).

Then, a lamp data output process is performed (S1202). In the lamp data output process (S1202), the set lamp data (data for controlling the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54) so that the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 are caused to emit light at a timing suitable for the effect is output to the sub drive substrate. To 162. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 controls the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54, so that the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 have a special first light emission mode (see FIG. )), special second light emission mode (see FIGS. 26C and D), special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26F), and special error light emission mode (see FIG. 30B). It is possible to emit light with.

Next, drive control processing (S1203) is performed. In the drive control process (S1203), drive data is created and output so as to drive the movable board 55k at a timing suitable for the performance. That is, the movable board 55k is driven in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. Then, the watchdog timer process (S1204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and the process is finished.

[10 ms timer interrupt process] The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 51, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S1010), first, a received command analysis process described later is performed (S1301). Next, a switch state acquisition process for storing the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process in the effect RAM 124 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process is performed (S1302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display content of the display screen 50a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S1302) is performed (S1303).

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates audio data (control data for outputting audio from the speaker 620) or executes audio control processing for outputting audio data to the image control board 140 (S1304). By this voice control processing (S1304), as will be described later, a voice "setting can be changed" (see FIGS. 26B and E) and a voice "setting value has been changed" (FIG. 26C). ) (D)), a voice "setting value has been confirmed", and a special error sound (see FIG. 30B) can be output from the speaker 620. After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes other processing such as creating lamp data and updating various effect determination random numbers (S1305), and ends this processing.

[Reception Command Analysis Processing] As shown in FIG. 52, in the reception command analysis processing (S1301), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the game control board 100 (S1401), If it has been received, the variation effect start processing described later is performed (S1402).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1403), and if it has received the fluctuation effect end processing (S1404). In the fluctuation effect ending process (S1404), the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation effect ending command for ending the fluctuation effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1405), and if it has received the opening effect selection process (S1406). In the opening effect selection process (S1406), the opening command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1407), and if it has received, performs a round effect selection process (S1408). In the round effect selection processing (S1408), the round designation command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the game control board 100 (S1409), and if it is received, an ending effect selection process is performed (S1410). In the ending effect selection process (S1410), the ending command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value designation command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1411), and if it has received the set value flag change processing (S1412). In the setting value flag changing process (S1412), the setting value flag 125 of the effect RAM 124 is set based on the setting value information included in the setting value designation command. For example, if the setting value designation command includes the information of the setting value “1”, the setting value flag 125 is set to “1”, and the setting value designation command includes the information of the setting value “6”. For example, the set value flag 125 is set to "6". As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the current set value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the initialization of the effect RAM 124 (setting value flag 125) in step S1002 (see FIG. 48) described above, the present time is based on the received setting value designation command. It is possible to grasp the set value in. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to execute a design setting suggesting effect and a high setting suggesting effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting mode shift command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1413), and if it has received the setting mode shift effect process (S1414). In the setting mode transition effect process (S1414), a setting mode transition effect command for displaying the setting change image SH shown in FIG. 26B is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting mode transition effect command displays the setting change image SH on the display screen 50a.

In addition, in the setting mode transition effect process (S1414), voice data for outputting the voice "Setting can be changed" (see FIG. 26B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data causes the speaker 620 to output a voice “setting change is possible”. In the setting mode transition effect process (S1414), lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emission mode (see FIG. 26B) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. Set to. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in the special first light emission mode. As described above, the display of the image SH during the setting change, the sound "the setting can be changed", and the light emission in the special first light emission mode allow the setting changer to shift to the setting change mode and arbitrarily set the setting. It is possible to know that the value can be changed.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value change command has been received from the game control board 100 (S1415), and if it has received, a set value change effect process (S1416). In the set value change effect process (S1416), a set value change effect command for displaying the set value change image YG shown in FIG. 26(C) or FIG. 26(D) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting value change effect command displays the setting value change image YG on the display screen 50a over the setting change image SH (layered). As a result, it is possible to make the setting value change image YG easier to recognize than the setting change image SH, and preferentially show the situation in which the setting value is changed.

Further, in the set value change effect process (S1416), sound data for outputting the sound "The set value has been changed" (see FIG. 26C or FIG. 26D) is stored in the effect RAM 124 in a predetermined manner. Set to the storage area of. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data causes the speaker 620 to output the voice “the setting value has been changed”. Further, in the set value change effect process (S1416), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emission mode (see FIG. 26C or FIG. 26D) is used for effect. It is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 124. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emission mode. As described above, the display of the setting value change image YG, the sound "the setting value has been changed", and the light emission in the special second light emission mode allow not only the person who has changed the setting but also the employees of the surrounding amusement park. It is possible to let the staff know the situation where the set value is changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the setting mode end command is received from the game control board 100 (S1417), and if it is received, the setting mode end effect process is performed (S1418). In the setting mode end effect process (S1418), a set value decision effect command for displaying the set value decision image SK shown in FIG. 26(F) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting value confirmation effect command displays the setting change image SH shown in FIG. 26(E) on the display screen 50a, and then performs the setting shown in FIG. 26(F). The value confirmation image SK is displayed.

In addition, in the setting mode end effect process (S1418), voice data for outputting a voice "reference value is confirmed" (see FIG. 26F) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data causes the speaker 620 to output the voice of “setting value is confirmed”. Further, in the setting mode end effect processing (S1418), lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 26F) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. Set to. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in the special third light emission mode. As described above, by the display of the set value confirmation image SK, the sound "the set value has been confirmed", and the light emission in the special third light emission mode, not only the person who has changed the setting but also the employee of the surrounding amusement park Also, it is possible to grasp the situation in which the set value is fixed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an error command is received from the game control board 100 (S1419), and if it is received, an error mode notification process is performed (S1420). .. In the error mode notification process (S1420), the operation suggestion effect command for displaying the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 30(B) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the operation suggestion effect command displays the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 30B on the display screen 50a.

Further, in the error mode notification process (S1420), voice data for outputting a special error sound (see FIG. 30B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data causes the speaker 620 to output a special error sound. In the error mode notification process (S1420), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode (see FIG. 30B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. To do. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode. As described above, the display of the operation suggestion image SE, the special error sound, and the light emission in the special error light emission mode cause the employee at the game arcade to enter the error mode, that is, the set value is set. It is possible to know that not.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting suggestion condition satisfaction command is received from the game control board 100 (S1421), and if received, turns on the setting suggestion condition satisfaction flag (S1422). The setting suggestion condition satisfaction flag is a flag indicating that the number of shots has become a multiple of 10,000 such as 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, 40,000, 50,000, and 60,000.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a process based on a received command other than the above commands (for example, a process for performing an effect associated with variable display of normal symbols) as another process (S1423). Then, the received command analysis process (S1301) is ended.

[Variation effect start process] As shown in FIG. 54, in the effect effect start process (S1402), the effect control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (S1501). The fluctuation start command includes information on a fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 18) and information on special figure stop symbol data based on a jackpot judgment or the like. Next, effect design selection processing which will be described later is executed (S1502), and subsequently, variable effect pattern selection processing which will be described later is executed (S1503).

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a notice effect selection process (S1504). As a result, the contents of the notice production such as so-called step-up notice production and chance-up notice production are determined. Next, a drive data setting process for setting drive data according to the selected variation effect pattern is executed (S1505).

After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a change effect start command for starting the change effect in the selected effect design, change effect pattern, and notice effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S1506) to change. The production start process (S1402) is ended. When the variation effect start command set in step S1506 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142 and displays it on the image display device 50. A variable effect is produced on the screen 50a.

[Production symbol selection process] The production symbol selection process (S1502) is a process for determining the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 to be finally stopped and displayed in the variable production. As shown in FIG. 55, in the effect symbol selection process (S1502), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the information of the variation pattern (see FIG. 18) indicates a gap (S1601). If it indicates a loss (YES in S1601), subsequently, using the loss effect symbol lottery table based on the set value flag 125, the loss effect symbol EZ is determined (S1602). The determined effect design EZ is the effect design EZ that is stopped and displayed at the end of the three effect designs EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 indicating the loss mode. Following step S1602, two effect symbols EZ excluding the lost effect symbol EZ are determined by lottery using an effect symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern, and this processing ends.

From the above, for example, if the setting value flag 125 indicates “6”, the lost effect design random number is acquired, and the lost effect design random number is obtained using the lost effect design lottery table shown in FIG. 34(F). judge. In this case, since the sixth effect symbol EZf is easily determined as the lost effect symbol EZ, the frequency of execution of the symbol setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 35B becomes high. As a result, it is possible to make the player infer that the set value is “6” and to be interested in the lost aspect of the effect design EZ.

On the other hand, in step S1601, if the information of the variation pattern does not indicate a loss (NO in S1601), it means that the jackpot has been won, and the process proceeds to step S1604. In this case, the three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 that are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) are determined by lottery using the jackpot effect symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern (S1604). , This process ends.

[Variation effect pattern selection process] The variation effect pattern selection process (S1503) is a process for determining a variation effect pattern which is the content of the variation effect. If the variation effect pattern is determined, the time of the variation effect, the variation display mode of the effect pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the content of the set value suggestion effect, SW The details of the content of the variable effect including the presence or absence of the effect (effect button effect), the content of the SW effect, the effect development configuration, the type of the background of the effect pattern, etc. will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the fluctuating effect pattern selection process (S1503), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the information of the fluctuating pattern (see FIG. 18) indicates SP reach loss (S1701). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation patterns are P11, P12, P13, P41, P42, P43 (see FIG. 18). If it indicates SP reach loss (YES in S1701), it is subsequently determined whether or not the setting suggestion condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1702). If it is ON (YES in S1702), the setting suggestion condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF (S1703), and the process proceeds to step S1704. In short, the case of proceeding to step S1704 means that the SP reach has been lost and the number of shot balls exceeds a multiple of 10,000 shots.

In step S1704, it is determined whether the value of the set value flag is "4", "5", or "6". If it is "4", "5", or "6" (YES in S1704), lottery is performed based on the variation pattern by using the variation effect pattern table for high setting suggestion effect not shown. As a result, the SP reach loss variation effect pattern with the high setting suggestion effect is determined, and this processing ends. In this way, when the SP reach loss variation effect pattern with the high setting suggestion effect is determined, the battle effect shown in FIG. 36(A)→the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 36(B)→the effect shown in FIG. 36(C) After the stop display in the losing mode of the symbol EZ, as shown in FIG. 36(D), a high setting suggestion effect showing the phoenix image FT is executed. As a result, it is as if the player who is discouraged due to SP reach loss gains a high setting (setting value is "4" or "5" or "6") by reviving by making the phoenix image FT grasp. It is possible to give a feeling of uplifting.

On the other hand, if the SP reach is not lost (NO in S1701), the setting condition suggestion flag is not ON (NO in S1702), and the set value is not the high setting (“4” or “5” or “6”) ( If NO at S1704), the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, based on the variation pattern, a lottery is performed using a variation effect pattern table for no high setting suggestion effect (not shown). As a result, the fluctuating effect pattern without the high setting suggesting effect is determined, and the present process ends.

12. Effect of the present embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is set, the setting is being changed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 22B. The image SH is displayed, the sound “setting can be changed” is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in the special first light emission mode. With these, it is possible to clearly show the situation in which the setting value can be changed. In particular, the display of the setting change image SH and the voice "setting can be changed" make it possible to clearly show the situation in which the set value can be changed both visually and auditorily. In addition, the display of the image SH during the setting change, the output of the sound "the setting can be changed", and the light emission in the special first light emission mode by the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 are set in the setting change mode. It continues to run only while you are there. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed and the setting key 184 is rotated to the rotation position. it can. However, if the setting key 184 is not properly rotated to the rotation position due to the carelessness or unfamiliar operation of the setting changer, the setting change mode cannot be entered. In other words, the display of the image SH during the setting change, the output of the sound "the setting can be changed", and the mode suggestion to the setting change mode of the light emission in the special first light emission mode by the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 start. Not done. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the setting key 184 has been correctly rotated depending on whether or not the mode suggestion to the setting change mode is started.

According to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the setting change mode ends and the mode suggestion ends even before the setting key 184 is completely returned from the rotational position to the standby position. Therefore, the end timing of the setting change mode can be set as early as possible, and the end timing of the mode suggestion can be set as soon as possible. Even if the setting key cylinder 180 is not inadvertently completely returned from the rotation position to the standby position, it is possible to recognize that the setting change mode has ended by ending the mode suggestion.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the selected setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a and the speaker 620 is displayed. Outputs a sound "the set value has been changed", and the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emission mode. As a result, it is possible to easily show to the person who has changed the setting and the surrounding people that the setting value has been changed.

13. Modification Example Hereinafter, a modification example will be described. In the description of the modified example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 having the above-described configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined appropriately. Further, the technical features in the above-described embodiment and the modified examples described below can be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<Second form>
In the above mode (first mode), as shown in FIG. 16, one setting value is selected from the normal setting range (predetermined setting range) from “1” to “6” (predetermined upper limit setting value). As a result, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, one setting value is selected from the small setting range (specific setting range) from “1” to “4” (small upper limit setting value). Thus, the game is configured to be played with the jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value. 57A to 57D show jackpot determination tables used when the set value is "1", the set value is "2", the set value is "3", and the set value is "4".

By the way, when the setting value can be set only to a value smaller than "6" as in the second embodiment, there are the following problems. As described above, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. In this case, in the second mode, "1" or "2" or "3" or "4" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Here, when the maximum setting value “4” is selected from the small setting range from “1” to “4”, a method of displaying “4” on the 7-segment display 300 can be considered. . However, when "4" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, an employee of the game hall such as a person who changes the setting may misunderstand that the maximum set value is not set. In other words, an employee of the amusement hall believes that the setting value can be changed from the normal setting range from "1" to "6", and even in the second form that can only set up to "4", it is "4" or more. It may be misunderstood that the set value exists.

Therefore, in the second mode, when the maximum setting value "4" is selected from the small setting range from "1" to "4", "6" ( The upper limit setting value) is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible for the employee at the game arcade who sees "6" on the 7-segment display 300 to easily understand that the maximum set value is set. That is, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that a larger set value is not set.

Here, in the second embodiment, the display conversion table shown in FIG. 58(A) is stored in the game ROM 103. In the display conversion table shown in FIG. 58A, the set value (the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107) and the value of the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 (hereinafter, “display value”) are displayed. Call)). Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the setting change mode process (S012) shown in FIG. 39 by using the set value information and the display conversion table shown in FIG. 58A in the process of step S032 or step S035. The value is determined and the displayed value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Further, in the set value confirmation mode process (S019) shown in FIG. 40, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the display value by using the set value information and the display conversion table shown in FIG. 58(A) in the process of step S050. Then, the displayed value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as described above. When the set value is “3” (set value that is one less than the small upper limit set value), “5” (next upper limit recognition value) is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. That is, "5" which is the second largest setting value in the normal setting range of "1" to "6" is displayed. This makes it possible for the employee at the game arcade who sees "5" on the 7-segment display 300 to easily understand that the second largest set value is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, “1” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. When the set value is “2”, “2” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. That is, the display value that is the same as the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is possible to let the employee of the game arcade who sees "1" on the 7-segment display 300 knows that the minimum set value is set, and "2" on the 7-segment display 300. It is possible to let the employee of the game arcade see that the second smallest set value is set.

By the way, the game control microcomputer 101 can transmit a setting value designation command (predetermined command) including information on the setting value to the effect control board 120. The timing for transmitting the setting value designation command is the same as in the first embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Here, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the setting value designation command is not the information indicating the display value on the 7-segment display 300, but the setting value information (the selected setting value (Information to show) is included. Specifically, when the setting value is "1", the information indicating "1" is included in the setting value specifying command, and when the setting value is "2", the information indicating "2". Is included in the setting value specifying command, and the setting value is “3”, the information indicating “3” is included in the setting value specifying command, and if the setting value is “4”, “4” is included. Is included in the setting value designation command. The reason for this is as follows.

If the set value designation command is to include information indicating the display value on the 7-segment display unit 300, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the display value from the set value information when generating the set value designation command. The process of grasping the information to be shown becomes necessary, and the load of the control process increases. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 can suppress an increase in control processing load by generating a setting value designation command that includes setting value information as it is. Then, even if the set value designation command including the set value information is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (effect control microcomputer 121), there is no particular problem.

That is, in the second mode, when the setting value (setting value information) is “1”, if the setting change mode transition operation is performed as shown in FIG. 59(A), as shown in FIG. 59(B). , "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, the setting change image SH is displayed, the voice "Setting change is possible" is output, and the light emission in the special first light emission mode is executed. To be done. Next, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 59(C), “2” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, the set value change image YG is displayed, and “Set value is The sound "changed" and the light emission in the special second light emission mode are executed. Then, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 59(D), “5” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, and the set value change image YG is displayed and “the set value is The sound "changed" and the light emission in the special second light emission mode are executed. Next, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 59(E), “6” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, and the set value change image YG is displayed and “Set value is The sound "changed" and the light emission in the special second light emission mode are executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is returned to "1", so that "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. 59(F). Further, at this time, the initial setting restoration image SF indicating the text "It is the initial setting value" is displayed on the display screen 50a over the setting change image SH and the voice "the setting value has been changed". And light emission in a special second light emission mode are executed.

As can be seen from the above description, the effect control microcomputer 121 that has received the set value designation command outputs the set values mainly in the image display device 50 (effect display means), the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, and the panel lamp 54. It only suggests that the change has been made, and the above suggestions can be implemented regardless of the displayed value on the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 does not need the information of the display value on the 7-segment display device 300, and it is sufficient if it can grasp what is the largest setting value from the minimum setting value “1”. . Even in the case of the symbol setting suggesting effect and the high setting suggesting effect described in the first form (see FIGS. 33 and 34), the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the highest setting value from the minimum setting value “1”. If it can be grasped, it is possible to sufficiently execute the symbol setting suggesting effect and the high setting suggesting effect. Therefore, even if the effect control microcomputer 121 receives from the game control microcomputer 101 a setting value designation command including setting value information itself (information indicating any value from “1” to “4”), There is no particular problem.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second embodiment, unlike the normal setting range of “1” to “6”, one setting value is selected from the small setting range of “1” to “4”. You can choose. However, if the setting value is set to "4" and "4" is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300, it is determined whether the setting value is the maximum setting value in the small setting range. It becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in this case, the maximum setting value "6" in the normal setting range is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Accordingly, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the maximum setting value is set on the 7-segment display unit 300, and it is possible to prevent misunderstanding when the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300. Is.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second mode, when the set value “3” which is one smaller than “4” is selected, “3” is not displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Instead, the setting value "5", which is one less than the maximum setting value "6" in the normal setting range, is displayed. This makes it easy to understand that the second largest set value is set on the 7-segment display 300.

According to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second embodiment, for example, when the set value is selected as “4”, as described above, the 7-segment display 300 displays “6”, but for game control. The microcomputer 101 sends a setting value designation command including information (setting value information) indicating the setting value "4" to the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect control board 120). In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 does not include the information obtained by converting the setting value information indicating "4" into "6" in the setting value designation command, and simplifies the control processing for generating the setting value designation command. Is possible. Then, for the production control microcomputer 121, if the setting value information is known, it is possible to know what number the setting value is from "1", and there is no particular problem.

<Third form>
In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the 7-segment display 300 displays a number corresponding to the set value. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the 7-segment display 300 displays characters other than numbers corresponding to the set values. Here, in the third form, not the pachinko gaming machine PY1 capable of setting one setting value from the small setting range from "1" to "4" as in the second form, but "as in the first form". It is configured as a pachinko gaming machine PY1 capable of setting one setting value from the normal setting range from "1" to "6". That is, in the third mode, the jackpot determination table used when the set value is “1”, the set value is “2”, the set value is “3”, the set value is “4”, the set value is “5”, and the set value is “6”. (See FIGS. 16A to 16F) is stored in the game ROM 103.

In the third mode, the display conversion table shown in FIG. 60(A) is stored in the game ROM 103. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101, in the setting change mode process (S012) shown in FIG. 39, displays using the set value information and the display conversion table shown in FIG. 60(A) in the process of step S032 or step S035. The value is determined and the displayed value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300. Further, in the set value confirmation mode process (S019) shown in FIG. 40, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the display value using the set value information and the display conversion table shown in FIG. 60(A) in the process of step S050. Then, the displayed value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300.

Therefore, when the set value is “1”, “L” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. “L” is a character for making it easy to recognize that the setting value is the minimum. Thereby, it is possible for the employee of the game arcade who sees "L" on the 7-segment display 300 to easily understand that the minimum set value is set. Further, when the set value is "2", "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, and when the set value is "3", "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. If it is displayed and the set value is "4", "4" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300.

When the set value is "5", "h" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. “H” is a character (recognition value) for making it easy to recognize that it is the second largest setting value among the settable values. Thereby, it is possible for the employee at the game arcade who sees "h" on the 7-segment display 300 to easily understand that the second largest set value is set. Here, in the second mode, when the setting value is set to “3” in the small setting range from “1” to “4”, the 7-segment display 300 recognizes it as the second largest setting value. "5" is displayed so that it can be done. However, when the numeral “5” is displayed on the 7-segment display device 300, there is a possibility that an employee of the game arcade may doubt that “5” actually exists as the set value. Therefore, if “h” different from the numeral is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as the second largest set value as in the third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned doubt from being held.

When the set value is “6”, “H” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. “H” is a character (recognition value) for making it easy to recognize that the setting value is the largest among the settable values. This makes it possible for the employee at the game arcade who sees "H" on the 7-segment display 300 to easily understand that the minimum set value is set. Here, in the second embodiment, when the setting value is set to “4” in the small setting range from “1” to “4”, the 7-segment display 300 can recognize it as the maximum setting value. "6" is displayed on the screen. However, when the numeral “6” is displayed on the 7-segment display device 300, there is a possibility that an employee of the game arcade may be skeptical that “6” actually exists as the set value. Therefore, by displaying “H”, which is the most different from the number, as the set value on the 7-segment display 300 as in the third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned suspicion from being held.

In the third mode, unlike the second mode, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the set value designation command (specific command) is not set value information (information indicating the selected set value) but 7 The information indicating the display value on the segment display 300 is included. Specifically, when the set value is "1", information indicating "L" is included in the set value designation command, and when the set value is "2", information indicating "2". Is included in the setting value specifying command, and the setting value is “3”, the information indicating “3” is included in the setting value specifying command, and if the setting value is “4”, “4” is included. When the setting value designation command includes information indicating “”, the setting value is “5”, the information indicating “h” is included in the setting value designation command, and the setting value is “6”. Is included in the setting value designation command.

Thus, in the third embodiment, as a table for displaying on the 7-segment display unit 300, a table corresponding in a one-to-one correspondence with the display conversion table shown in FIG. 60A is provided. Then, when the setting value designation command is generated using this table, the information indicating the display value (the value to be displayed on the 7-segment display 300) is grasped from the setting value information and displayed in the setting value designation command. Include information that indicates the value. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 that has received the setting value designation command can grasp the display value that is actually displayed on the 7-segment display 700. As a result, for example, the display value is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 (effect display means), the voice indicating the display value is output from the speaker 620, or the frame lamp 212 or the panel lamp 54 emits light indicating the display value. It is possible to emit light in an embodiment.

Further, in the third embodiment, even if the relationship between the set value (set value information) and the display value on the 7-segment display 300 changes due to a model change or the like, the set value designation command includes the information indicating the display value. The effect control microcomputer 121 can perform suggestion of a display value using effect means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, the board lamp 54, etc.) without making a large change. .. That is, for example, when the 7-segment display 300 is changed to display “A” instead of “H” when the maximum set value is set, the display value “A” is displayed in the set value designation command. Changed to include the information shown. As a result, in the effect control microcomputer 121 that has received the setting value designation command, “A” is suggested on the display screen 50a, a sound indicating “A” is output from the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212 or the panel lamp. It is possible to easily cope with the change in that the light is emitted in the light emitting mode indicating “A” at 54.

In the third mode, when the setting value (setting value information) is “1” in the setting change mode, “L” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. 61(A). It Then, every time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the 7-segment display 300 switches from “2” to “3” to “4” to “h” to “H”. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the “7” segment display 300 is displaying “H”, the 7-segment display 300 returns to “L” as shown in FIG. 61(A). It will be. Each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the display on the 7-segment display unit 300 is switched, the set value change image YG is displayed, the voice "the set value has been changed", and a special message. Light emission in two light emission modes is executed.

Here, in the third embodiment, the display value information included in the setting value designation command will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 62. As shown in FIG. 63, the setting value designation command is composed of two bytes, a first byte and a second byte. A command for a pachinko gaming machine is generally composed of 2 bytes. The first byte has bit 0, bit 1, bit 2, bit 3, bit 4, bit 5, bit 6 and bit 7, and is composed of a total of 8 bits. The second byte also has bit 0, bit 1, bit 2, bit 3, bit 4, bit 5, bit 6 and bit 7, and is composed of a total of 8 bits. In the first byte and the second byte, bit 0 is the least significant bit and bit 7 is the most significant bit. Each bit contains information of "1" (ON) or "0" (OFF).

As shown in FIG. 67, bit 7 of the first byte is “1” and bit 7 of the second byte is “0”. By doing so, it means that it is a command. In the first byte, bit 6 has "0", bit 5 has "0", bit 4 has "0", bit 3 has "1", and bit 2 has "1". , Bit 1 is “1” and bit 0 is “1”. By doing so, it means that the command is a setting value designation command.

Then, in the set value designation command, bits 0 to 7 of the second byte correspond to lighting or extinguishing in the lighting portions LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 24) of the 7-segment display 300. I am trying to let you. That is, the display value corresponding to the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display device 300. For example, when "H" is displayed as the display value, the lighting portion LB25 does not light up, the lighting portion LB26 lights up (emits light), the lighting portion LB27 lights up, and the lighting portion LB28 does not light up. The part LB29 lights up, the lighting part LB30 lights up, the lighting part LB31 lights up, and the lighting part LB32 does not light up. Therefore, in this case, as information of the display value included in the setting value designation command, bit 0 is set to “0”, bit 1 is set to “1”, bit 2 is set to “1”, and bit 3 is set to “0”. , Bit 4 is set to “1”, bit 5 is set to “1”, bit 6 is set to “1”, and bit 7 is set to “0”.

Here, when the display value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300, the lighting portion LB32 of the fourth display area 340 does not always emit light. Therefore, bit 7 of the second byte is always "0". As described above, bit 7 of the second byte must be set to “0” to mean a command. However, in displaying the display value, bit 7 of the second byte is set to a lighting part that does not need to be lighted. Since it corresponds, even if it is always "0", there is no problem.

As described above, from the bit 0 to the bit 7 of the second byte of the setting value designation command, the lighting (light emission) or the light extinction (non-light emission) in each lighting portion LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340 is directly associated. , "0" or "1" information is included. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can easily generate a setting value designation command including information on the display value on the 7-segment display device 300. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 that has received the setting value designation command can easily decode the information of the display value included in the setting value designation command. As a result, even if the relationship between the set value and the display value on the 7-segment display device 300 is changed due to a model change or the like, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the suggestion of the display value without performing a special change process. It is possible.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment, when the set value is set to “6” from the normal setting range from “1” to “6”, the 7-segment display 300 is displayed. Then, the set value “6” is not displayed, but “H” that makes it easy to recognize that the set value is the largest is displayed. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "5", the 7-segment display 300 does not display the set value "5", and it is easy to recognize that the set value is the second largest "h". Is displayed. In this way, it is possible to correctly show how much the set value is set on the 7-segment display 300.

According to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment, for example, when the set value is set to "6", while the "H" is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300, the game control microcomputer 101 is for effect control. A setting value designation command including information indicating “H” is transmitted to the microcomputer 121. Therefore, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 121 displays (indicates) “H” using the image display device 50, “H” is displayed on the image display device 50 and “H” is displayed on the 7-segment display device 300. It is possible to make the display of “” the same, and it is possible to prevent the display from being different and causing a feeling of strangeness.

According to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third mode, as shown in FIG. 62, when the display value (for example, “H”) is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, the second byte of the setting value designation command is configured. Bits 0 to 7 to be performed include information corresponding to lighting (light emission) or extinguishing in the lighting portions LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340, respectively. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 can easily configure a setting value designation command including information indicating a display value (for example, “H”).

<Fourth form>
Next, a fourth mode will be described. Before describing the fourth mode, the jackpot determination table of the comparative example shown in FIG. 63 will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, the table is divided corresponding to each set value from “1” to “6”. Further, among the tables corresponding to the respective set values, the tables are classified according to the gaming state of the normal probability state or the high probability state. Then, a lower limit determination value and an upper limit determination value are set in each of the tables corresponding to the set value and the game state. Therefore, for example, when the setting value is "1" and the gaming state is the "normal gaming state", the lower limit determination value is set to "10001" and the upper limit determination value is set to "10509". Therefore, when the setting value is “1” and the gaming state is the “normal gaming state”, the jackpot random number that is any value from “0” to “65535” is the lower limit determination value (“10001”). ) And the upper limit determination value (“10509”), it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is not between the lower limit determination value (“10001”) and the upper limit determination value (“10509”), there is a loss. Will be judged. The jackpot determination table as shown in FIG. 64 is stored in the game ROM 103.

In the jackpot determination table of the comparative example shown in FIG. 63, the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value are set separately in each of the tables corresponding to the set value and the gaming state. The lower limit determination value or the upper limit determination value is a 2-byte value that is determined as a value from "0" to "65535". Therefore, in the jackpot determination table of the comparative example shown in FIG. 63, since a total of 24 lower limit determination values and upper limit determination values are set, the total storage capacity is 48 bytes (24×2 bytes). Since the set values can be set from "1" to "6" in this way, there is a problem that the storage capacity in the jackpot determination table increases.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 64 is used. The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 64 is stored in the game ROM 103. In the jackpot determination table of the fourth form shown in FIG. 64, each set value from “1” to “6” and a gaming state of a normal probability state or a high probability state are classified. However, separate lower limit judgment values are not set corresponding to the set value and the game state, respectively, and in the normal game state, a common lower limit judgment value "10001 (common lower limit judgment value)" regardless of the set value. Is set, and only one common lower limit judgment value “10001 (common lower limit judgment value)” is set regardless of the set value even in the high probability state. On the other hand, the upper limit set value is set separately for each of the set value and the gaming state.

Therefore, for example, when the set value is "1" and the gaming state is the "normal gaming state", the jackpot random numbers have a common lower limit determination value ("10001") and upper limit determination value ("10509"). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not it is between. Further, for example, when the set value is "2" and the game state is "normal game state", the jackpot random number is a common lower limit determination value ("10001") and upper limit determination value ("10529"). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined depending on whether or not it is in between.

Thus, in the jackpot determination table of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 64, two lower limit determination values are set in total and 12 upper limit determination values are set in total, so a total of 28 bytes (14×2 bytes). There is only memory capacity. Therefore, the jackpot determination table can be significantly compressed as compared to the jackpot determination table of the comparative example shown in FIG. 63. In other words, even if the set value can be set from "1" to "6", it is possible to suppress the increase in the storage capacity of the jackpot determination table as much as possible. Furthermore, as a result of being able to suppress an increase in the storage area of the jackpot judgment table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity also in the effect table created corresponding to the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value. .

Here, instead of the jackpot determination table of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 64, the jackpot determination table of the first modification of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 65 may be used. In the jackpot determination table of the first modified example shown in FIG. 65, the common lower limit determination value “10001” is set regardless of the set value in the normal game state, whereas the common lower limit determination value is set in the high probability state. Is not set. Therefore, for example, when the setting value is "1" and the gaming state is "high probability state", the common lower limit judgment value "10001" in the normal gaming state is used, and the jackpot random number is common. Whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether it is between the lower limit determination value (“10001”) and the upper limit determination value (“10509”) of. As a result, in the jackpot determination table of the first modified example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 65, only one lower limit determination value is set and a total of 12 upper limit determination values are set, so a total of 26 bytes. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity to (13 pieces×2 bytes). In the jackpot determination table of the first modified example of the fourth mode shown in FIG. 65, a common lower limit determination value (“10001”) is set in the table corresponding to the normal probability state, but in the high probability state. A common lower limit determination value (“10001”) may be set in the corresponding table.

Further, in the jackpot determination table of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 64, the lower limit determination value is set to be common regardless of the set value in the normal gaming state or the high probability state. On the other hand, the jackpot determination table of the second modified example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 66 can be used. In the jackpot determination table of the second modified example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 66, only one common upper limit determination value “19999 (common upper limit determination value)” is set in the normal gaming state regardless of the set value, Even in the high probability state, only one common upper limit determination value “19999 (common upper limit determination value)” is set regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the lower limit judgment value is set separately for each of the set value and the game state.

Therefore, for example, when the set value is "1" and the game state is "normal game state", the jackpot random number is the upper limit determination value ("19999") common to the lower limit determination value ("19491"). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not it is between. Further, for example, when the setting value is "2" and the game state is "normal game state", the jackpot random number is the lower limit determination value ("19471") and the common upper limit determination value ("19999"). Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined depending on whether or not it is in between.

Thus, in the jackpot determination table of the second comparative example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 66, a total of two upper limit determination values and a total of 12 lower limit determination values are set, so a total of 28 bytes (14 There is only a storage capacity of (piece x 2 bytes). Therefore, the jackpot determination table can be significantly compressed as compared to the jackpot determination table of the comparative example shown in FIG. 63.

Here, instead of the jackpot determination table of the second comparative example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 66, it is also possible to carry out using the jackpot determination table of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. In the jackpot determination table of the third modification example shown in FIG. 67, the common upper limit determination value “19999” is set regardless of the set value in the normal game state, whereas the common upper limit determination value is set in the high probability state. Is not set. Therefore, for example, when the setting value is "1" and the game state is "high probability state", the jackpot random number is the lower limit determination value by using the upper limit determination value "19999" in the normal game state. Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined depending on whether it is between ("18129") and the common upper limit determination value ("19999"). As a result, in the jackpot determination table of the third modified example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 67, only one upper limit determination value is set and 12 lower limit determination values are set in total, so a total of 26 bytes. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity to (13 pieces×2 bytes). In the jackpot determination table of the third modified example of the fourth mode shown in FIG. 67, the common upper limit determination value (“19999”) is set in the table corresponding to the normal probability state, but in the high probability state. A common upper limit determination value (“19999”) may be set in the corresponding table.

Next, the jackpot determination process in the fourth mode will be described. In the jackpot determination process, in the special operation process (S104) of the main timer interrupt process (S005) shown in FIG. 43, the jackpot random number acquired in the starting opening sensor detection process (S103) is the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value. This is a process of determining whether or not there is a gap. Before describing the big hit determination process in the fourth embodiment, the big hit determination process of the comparative example shown in FIG. 68 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the jackpot determination process of the comparative example, the game control microcomputer 101 (specifically, the game CPU 102) first determines the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A value, figure 15) is read (S1051). Specifically, in the jackpot determination process based on the ball entering the first starting opening 11, the jackpot random number counter value stored as the first holding information in the first special figure holding storage unit 105a is read. Further, in the jackpot determination process based on the ball entering the second starting opening 12, the jackpot random number counter value stored as the first holding information in the second special figure holding storage unit 105b is read. Next, the currently set setting value is referred to based on the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 (S1052). Then, the jackpot determination table corresponding to the currently set value and the gaming state is referred to (S1053). For example, if the currently set setting value is "1" and it is in the normal probability state, as shown in FIG. 63, a table having a lower limit judgment value "10001" and an upper limit judgment value "10509" is created. refer. Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained jackpot random number is between the lower limit determination value (“10001”) and the upper limit determination value (“10509”) of the table (S1054), and the jackpot determination process of the comparative example ends. Become.

By the way, in the jackpot determination process of the comparative example, the process of referring to the set value in step S1052 is always required. Furthermore, the process of referring to the jackpot determination table corresponding to the set value and the game state in step S1053 is always required. Therefore, compared to a pachinko gaming machine that does not select (set) a setting value as in the related art, the processing load of the jackpot determination processing is large (heavy). Further, the jackpot determination process is significantly different from that of a pachinko gaming machine that does not select (set) a set value, and a design change from a pachinko gaming machine that does not select a set value becomes complicated.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the power-on process (S001) and the big hit determination process are configured as follows. The power-on process of the fourth mode (S001, see FIG. 69) is different from the above-described power-on process of the first mode (S001, see FIG. 38) only in the other power-on process. That is, in the power-on process (S001) of the fourth embodiment, the other power-on process of step S024 shown in FIG. 69 is executed instead of the other power-on process of step S022 shown in FIG. ing. The jackpot determination process of the fourth mode will be described based on FIG. 71, as will be described later.

[Other Power-on Processing] In the other power-on processing (S024) of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the game control microcomputer 101 (game CPU 102 (game control unit)) first sets the set value. Based on the setting value information stored in the information storage unit 107, the currently set setting value is referred to (S025). Next, the jackpot determination table corresponding to the currently set setting value is referenced (S026). At this time, the jackpot determination table for both the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is referred to. For example, if the currently set value is "1", as shown in FIG. 64, refer to the table for the normal probability state in which the lower limit judgment value is "10001" and the upper limit judgment value is "10509". At the same time, the table for the high probability state in which the lower limit determination value is “10001” and the upper limit determination value is “11871” is referred to.

Then, the lower limit judgment value (“10001”) and the upper limit judgment value (“10509”) set in the table for the normal probability state are expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 (expansion storage unit), The lower limit judgment value (“10001”) and the upper limit judgment value (“11871”) set in the probability state table are expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 (S027). After that, other initial setting processing (for example, processing for setting the gaming CPU 102, processing for setting SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc.) is performed, and this processing ends. The other power-on processing (S024) corresponds to the "initial setting processing".

[Big hit determination process] In the big hit determination process (S024) of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the game control microcomputer 101 (game CPU 102) first sets a big hit random number counter value (label-TRND- The value of A (see FIG. 15) is read (S1041). Subsequently, in the game RAM 104, a predetermined storage area in which the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value are expanded is referred to in correspondence with the game state. For example, as described above, if the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal gaming state, the predetermined storage area in which the lower limit determination value of "10001" and the upper limit determination value of "10509" are expanded is referred to. To do. If the set value is "1" and the probability is high, the predetermined storage area in which the lower limit determination value of "10001" and the upper limit determination value of "11871" are expanded is referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained jackpot random number is between the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value (S1043), and the jackpot determination process of the fourth mode is ended.

As described above, in the jackpot determination process of the fourth embodiment, different from the jackpot determination process of the comparative example, a process of referring to the set value (see step S1052 shown in FIG. 68) and a process of referencing the jackpot determination table corresponding to the set value. (See step S1053 shown in FIG. 68) is unnecessary. This is because in the other power-on process (S024), the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value are expanded in advance in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 (see step S027). In this way, in the fourth embodiment, the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value are expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 only when the power is turned on, so that the set value is referred to each time the jackpot determination process is performed and the set value is set. It is not necessary to perform the process of referring to the jackpot determination table corresponding to. As a result, even with a pachinko gaming machine PY1 capable of selecting (setting) a set value, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the jackpot determination processing from becoming large. That is, it is possible to prevent the processing speed of the jackpot determination processing by the gaming CPU 102 from slowing down.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 64 is used instead of the jackpot determination table of the comparative example shown in FIG. 63, and the common lower limit determination value and upper limit determination value are respectively determined in the game RAM 104. Expand to the storage area of. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity developed in the gaming RAM 104, compared with the case where each of the lower limit determination values that are not shared is developed in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104.

And the difference between the jackpot determination process of the fourth embodiment and the jackpot determination process in a pachinko gaming machine that does not select (set) a set value as in the conventional game is that a game in which an upper limit determination value and a lower limit determination value are expanded. Whether to refer to a predetermined storage area of the RAM 104 for use (see the address of the game RAM 104) or to refer to the jackpot determination table in which the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value are set (see the address of the jackpot determination table) Only the difference. Therefore, it is possible to perform a jackpot determination process that is almost the same as the jackpot determination process in a pachinko gaming machine that does not select (set) a set value. As a result, it is possible to simplify design changes from a pachinko gaming machine that does not select a set value.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth mode, in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 64, the lower limit determination value (“10001”) common to the table for the normal probability state and the table for the high probability state is stored. However, the upper limit determination value corresponding to each set value is stored in each of the table for the normal probability state and the table for the high probability state. In other words, the table for the normal probability state and the table for the high probability state do not store the lower limit determination value for determining a big hit in correspondence with each of the set values, but a common lower limit determination value ( Only "10001") is stored. In this way, even with the pachinko gaming machine PY1 set to any of the plurality of set values, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the jackpot determination table.

According to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth mode, in the other power-on process (S024) when the power is turned on, the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 64 is referred to, and the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination corresponding to the set value are determined. The value and is expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 refers to the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value developed in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined judgment condition, to determine whether it is a big hit. Can be determined. Here, the predetermined determination condition is that the jackpot game (special game) is not being executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not being displayed, and there is either the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold. .. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 refers to the jackpot determination table corresponding to the set value every time a predetermined determination condition is satisfied (each time the jackpot determination process is executed). It is possible to lose it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game CPU 102 (game control microcomputer 101).

<Other modifications>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26B, 26C, and 26D, the set value may be directly shown on the 7-segment display 300, while the display screen 50a and the speaker of the image display device 50 are displayed. The 620 was not used to directly indicate the set point. On the other hand, like the modification shown in FIG. 52, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 and the speaker 620 may be used to directly indicate the set value.

That is, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 72(B), in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display unit 300, the set value (for example, ““ 1”) is displayed, and the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 displays an initial set value image YG1 indicating the set value (for example, “1”) from above the setting change image SH. With this initial set value image YG1, it is possible for the person who has changed the setting and the employees of the surrounding game arcade to more easily understand the set value that was set before the power was turned on. In this modified example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a set value designation command in step S033 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the set value designation command. Display control of the image YG1 may be executed.

Thereafter, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 72C, the setting value “2” is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display unit 300, and the image display device is displayed. On the display screen 50a of 50, the changed set value image YG2 indicating the set value “2” is displayed from above the setting change image SH. Further, at this time, the speaker 620 outputs the voice "the setting value has been changed to "2"". The display of the changed set value image YG2 and the sound from the speaker 620 allow the person who has changed the setting and the surrounding staff in the amusement hall to understand the changed set value in a more understandable manner. In this modified example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the set value designation command in step S037 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the set value designation command. It suffices to execute the display control of the image YG2 and the voice control that "the setting value has been changed to "2"".

Subsequently, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 72D, the changed set value image YG3 showing the set value “3” is displayed on the display screen 50a, and the speaker is displayed. 620 will output the voice "The setting value has been changed to "3"", and the notification of the setting value will change from "2" to "3". It is similar to the case shown.

After that, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the 7-segment display 300 performs the initial display from the state shown in FIG. 72E to the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as shown in FIG. 72F. A set value confirmation notification image SL indicating the text "The set value has been confirmed to be "3"" is displayed on. Further, at this time, the speaker 620 outputs the voice "The set value is fixed to "3"". By displaying the set value confirmation notification image SL and the sound from the speaker 620, it is possible for the person who has changed the setting and the employees in the surrounding amusement park to understand the set value that is determined more easily. In this modified example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the setting mode end command in step S040 shown in FIG. 34, and the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the setting mode end command, and the set value is determined. It suffices to execute the display control of the notification image SL and the voice control that "the set value has been set to "3"".

As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 72 has an advantage that it is easy to grasp the set value that was set before the power was turned on, the changed set value, and the confirmed set value. On the other hand, there is a demerit that there is a high risk that the setting value will be grasped by anyone other than the employee at the game arcade. It should be noted that a light emitting means such as the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 may be used to notify the set value set before the power is turned on, the changed set value, and the confirmed set value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value displayed in the lighting mode (changeable mode) on the 7-segment display 300 becomes a non-display mode as shown in FIG. Instead, the initial display is executed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, as in the modification shown in FIG. 73, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the set value displayed in the lighting mode may be changed to a display mode other than the non-display mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 73(A), in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the set value indicating, for example, “3” is displayed in the lighting mode in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. When the setting confirmation operation is performed at this time, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the set value indicating “3” in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display device 300 blinks (flashes and turns off repeatedly. Mode). This makes it possible for the person who has changed the setting to more easily indicate which setting value has been set. Then, after the set value is displayed in a blinking manner for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 73(C), the set value is in a non-display manner, and the initial display is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300. It may be executed. In the modification shown in FIG. 73, the display mode of the setting value shown in the setting change mode is the lighting mode and the display mode of the setting value shown when the setting confirmation operation is performed is the blinking mode. The display mode is an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 does not display the base when displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300, and does not display the set value when displaying the base. .. However, as in the modification shown in FIG. 74, in the 7-segment display device 300, for example, the base is displayed in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, and the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, for example. You may do so. In this case, the employee at the game arcade can grasp both the set value and the base at the same time. It should be noted that which of the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 displays the set value or the base can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the set value and the base can be displayed on one 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 75, the display means for displaying the set value and the display means for displaying the base may be separately provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the first display means (7-segment display) 300A, and as shown in FIG. 75(B), The base may be displayed in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the second display means (7-segment display) 300B. The display means for displaying the set value or the base is not limited to the 7-segment display, but may be another segment display, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the sub liquid crystal display device, or the like. Further, display means for displaying the set value and display means for displaying the base may be provided on a board other than the game control board 100.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the backup power from the capacitor CA3 is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 and then returned to the payout control board 170 again. Absent. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 76, the backup power from the capacitor CA3 is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and then returned to the payout control board 170 again to be supplied. ing.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the electric circuit DK2 of this modified example, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by the harness HN5. The connector CN9 at one end of the harness HN5 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN10 at the other end of the harness HN5 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN5 is provided with a wiring H11 for supplying electric power (normal power supply) of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 and a wiring H12 serving as a ground line.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A11 (specific power line) between the connector CN10 and the branch portion J3. The power line A11 is connected to the wiring H11 of the harness HN5 via the connector CN10. In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A14 connected to the ground G. The power line A14 is connected to the wiring H12 of the harness HN5 via the connector CN10.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN10 side of the power line A11. By this filter NF1, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied through the power line A11. A capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the branch line J3 side of the power line A11 with respect to the filter NF1. By this capacitor CA1, it is possible to prevent the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large.

A capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the branch portion J3 side of the power line A11 with respect to the capacitor CA1. This capacitor CA2 makes it possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply in the power line A11. There is a power line C11 (first specific power line) extending from the branch portion J3 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C11 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power source is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H11, the power line A11, and the power line C11. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can normally operate based on the normal power supply.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN6. The connector CN11 at one end of the harness HN6 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN12 at the other end of the harness HN6 is connected to the game control board 100. In the harness HN6, a wiring H16 for supplying backup power from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170, a wiring H14 for supplying backup power from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100, and a normal power supply. Wiring H15 for supplying from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 is provided.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A12 (second specific power line) extending from the branch portion J3 to the wiring H14 of the harness HN6. A resistor T1 similar to that shown in FIG. 10) is connected in series. This resistance T1 makes it possible to suppress the current flowing from the branch portion J3 to the resistance T1. A diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN11 side of the power line A12 with respect to the resistor T1. By this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge accumulated in the later-described capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) from flowing from the diode DO1 to the branch portion J3.

A capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the connector CN11 side of the power line A12 with respect to the diode DO1. As a result, at the time of power interruption, the backup power can be supplied by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3. A capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the connector CN11 side of the power line A12 with respect to the capacitor CA3. By this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied through the power line A12.

The power line A12 is connected to the wiring H14 via the connector CN11. The wiring H14 is connected to the power line D11 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN12. The power line D11 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. This makes it possible to supply the backup power from the capacitor CA3 to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line A12, the wiring H14, and the power line D11 when the power is cut off.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A13 extending from the branch portion J3 to the wiring H15 of the harness HN6. The power line A13 is connected to the wiring H15 via the connector CN11. The wiring H15 is connected to the power line D12 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN12. The power line D12 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, the normal power source can be supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H11, the power line A11, the power line A13, the wiring H15, and the power line D12.

In the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, the power line D13 is branched from the branch portion J4 of the power line D11 of the game control board 100. The power line D13 is connected to the wiring H16 via the connector CN12. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76, as long as the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by the harness HN6, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 is the power line A12, the wiring H14, and the power line D11. It is possible to supply to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line D13, the wiring H16, and the power line B11. That is, the backup power is supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 and then back from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170 to be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. It has become so.

Here, at the time of in-circuit inspection, as shown in FIG. 77, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls to supply power to the power line A11 and the power line A12. As a result, the in-circuit inspection is performed while the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. After the in-circuit inspection is completed, the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170. However, at this time, the payout control board 170 is not connected to the game control board 100 via the harness HN6 (see FIG. 76).

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 does not return from the payout control board 170 to the payout control board 170 via the game control board 100, and does not act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the payout control microcomputer 171 from occurring. At the stage of connecting the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 with the harness HN6 when assembling the entire pachinko gaming machine PY1, no charge remains in the capacitor CA3, so that the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. There is no such thing.

As described in detail above, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modification, as shown in FIG. 76, the capacitor CA3 provided on the payout control board 170 (specific control board) uses the backup power supply as the game control board. It can be supplied to 100 (another board) and can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 (specific control means) of the payout control board 170. Therefore, the backup power supply can be supplied to the two control boards without providing a capacitor as a backup power supply means in the power supply unit (power supply board, power supply unit), and a new backup power supply relationship is established. It is possible to

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modified example, when the game control board 100 is removed from the payout control board 170, the backup power is not supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100. Furthermore, since the backup power is not supplied from the payout control board 170 to the payout control board 170 via the game control board 100, the backup power is not supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171. Therefore, it is possible to initialize the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 at the same time when the game control board 100 is removed. That is, although the game control board 100 is removed and the control related to the game is stopped (the information related to the game is cleared in the game RAM 104), the information related to the payout remains in the payout RAM 174. It is possible to prevent the stored state. As a result, when the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 are operated again by the normal power source, it is possible to start the operation from a state in which they are both initialized.

According to the electric circuit DK2 of this modified example, as shown in FIG. 77, during in-circuit inspection, electric power of DC5V is supplied by the electric power line A11 and the electric power line A12, and electric charges are stored in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, the electric charge remains in the capacitor CA3 immediately after the in-circuit inspection. Therefore, after the in-circuit inspection, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170, the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are not connected. This makes it possible to prevent the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171, and prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from being defective. Note that other operational effects are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, it is impossible to switch between the conductive state in which the backup power can be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the non-conductive state in which the backup power cannot be supplied. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 78, a switch SW1 capable of switching between a conductive state in which the backup power can be supplied from the capacitor CA3 and a non-conductive state in which the backup power cannot be supplied from the capacitor CA3 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the electric circuit DK3 of this modified example, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 (specific control board) are connected by the harness HN7. The connector CN13 at one end of the harness HN7 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN14 at the other end of the harness HN7 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN7 is provided with a wiring H21 for supplying electric power (normal power supply) of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 and a wiring H22 serving as a ground line.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A21 between the connector CN14 and the branch portion J5. The power line A21 is connected to the wiring H21 of the harness HN7 via the connector CN14. In the payout control board 170, there is a power line A13 connected to the ground G. The power line A13 is connected to the wiring H22 of the harness HN7 via the connector CN14.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected to the connector CN14 side of the power line A21. A capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the branch line J5 side of the power line A21 with respect to the filter NF1. A capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 described in the comparative example (see FIG. 10) is connected in parallel to the branch portion J5 side of the power line A11 with respect to the capacitor CA1. There is a power line C21 from the branch portion J5 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C21 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power source is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H21, the power line A21, and the power line C21. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 (specific control means) can normally operate based on the normal power supply. The power line A21 corresponds to the "specific power line", and the power line C21 corresponds to the "normal power line".

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN8. The connector CN15 at one end of the harness HN8 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN16 at the other end of the harness HN8 is connected to the game control board 100. The wiring H24 for supplying backup power from the game control board 100 to the payout control board 170 and the wiring H25 for supplying normal power from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100 are provided in the harness HN8. There is.

The payout control board 170 has a power line A22 extending from the branch portion J5 to the wiring H24 of the harness HN8, and the branch line J5 side of the power line A22 is similar to the resistor T1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example. The resistor T1 is connected in series. A diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN15 side of the power line A22 with respect to the resistor T1.

A capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN15 side of the power line A22 with respect to the diode DO1. As a result, at the time of power interruption, the backup power can be supplied by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3. A capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN15 side of the power line A22 with respect to the capacitor CA3.

Further, a branch portion J6 is located on the side of the connector CN15 with respect to the capacitor CA4 in the power line A22. A power line A23 extends from the branch portion J6 toward the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line A23 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. However, in the third embodiment, the power line A23 is provided with the switch SW1. The switch SW1 (switching means) switches between a conductive state (first state) in which the backup power can be supplied in the power line A23 and a non-conductive state (second state) in which the backup power cannot be supplied in the power line A23. It is a thing.

The switch SW1 is a toggle switch that can be switched between a conductive state and a non-conductive state by a manual operation. However, the switching means that can switch the conductive state or the non-conductive state of the power line A23 is not limited to the mechanical switch SW1 such as the toggle switch. For example, it may be electronically controlled using a semiconductor element such as MOSFET, and can be appropriately changed. The power line A22 and the power line A23 correspond to “backup power line”.

Thus, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this modified example is set in the game hall, the switch SW1 is in the conductive state as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 is released, and the backup power supply can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A22 and the power line A23.

The power line A22 is connected to the wiring H24 via the connector CN15. The wiring H24 is connected to the power line D21 of the game control board 100 (another control board) via the connector CN16. The power line D21 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 (other control means) via the power line A22, the wiring H24, and the power line D21 when the power is cut off. is there.

The payout control board 170 has a power line C22 extending from the branch portion J5 to the wiring H25 of the harness HN8. The power line C22 is connected to the wiring H25 via the connector CN15. The wiring H25 is connected to the power line D22 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN16. The power line D22 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, the normal power supply can be supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 through the wiring H21, the power line A21, the power line A22, the wiring H25, and the power line D22.

Here, at the time of in-circuit inspection, as shown in FIG. 79, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls to supply power to the power line A21 and the power line A22. As a result, the in-circuit inspection is performed while the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CA3. Then, after the in-circuit inspection is completed, the switch SW1 is operated to bring the backup power supply into the non-conductive state in which the backup power cannot be supplied through the power line A23 (see FIG. 79). The switch SW1 may be in a non-conducting state before the in-circuit inspection is performed.

In this way, the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 while keeping the switch SW1 in the non-conductive state. As a result, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 does not act on the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A23. As a result, it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the payout control microcomputer 171 from occurring. Before assembling the entire pachinko gaming machine PY1, the switch SW1 is operated to bring it into a conducting state (see FIG. 58) where backup power can be supplied through the power line A23. This is because the backup power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 when the power is cut off.

As described in detail above, according to the electric circuit DK3 of this modification, the switch SW1 is brought into the non-conducting state in which the backup power cannot be supplied through the power line A23. As a result, the backup power cannot be supplied from the capacitor CA3 to the payout control microcomputer 171. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the backup power is unintentionally supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the payout control microcomputer 171.

Further, according to the electric circuit DK2 of this modified example, as shown in FIG. 79, at the time of in-circuit inspection, electric power of DC 5V is supplied by the electric power line A22, and electric charges are stored in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, the electric charge remains in the capacitor CA3 immediately after the in-circuit inspection. Therefore, when the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection, the switch SW1 is set to the non-conductive state in which the backup power cannot be supplied through the power line A23. This makes it possible to prevent the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171, and prevent the payout control microcomputer 171 from being defective. Note that other operational effects are substantially the same as the operational effects of the present embodiment described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28(A), when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the rotational position, the "H" level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101, As shown in FIG. 24(B), when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the middle of operation from the rotational position to the standby position, the switch signal switches from the “H” level to the “L” level, As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) is in the standby position, the "L" level switch signal is input to the game control microcomputer 101. However, as in the modification shown in FIG. 80, the relationship between the “H” level and the “L” level in the switch signal of the above-described form may be reversed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(A), when the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position, a switch signal of "H" level is input to the game control microcomputer 101, and as shown in FIG. 80(B). When the setting key cylinder 180 is in the middle of operation from the standby position to the rotating position, the switch signal switches from the “H” level to the “L” level, and as shown in FIG. When is in the rotation position, the switch signal of "L" level may be input to the game control microcomputer 101.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 80, as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the standby position, the switch signal is switched from the “H” level to the “L” level as shown in FIG. 80(B). Then, the setting change mode is entered. In this case, it is easy to unintentionally shift to the setting change mode due to an unfamiliar operation or vibration of the person who changes the setting. Therefore, the first mode (see FIG. 28) is preferable in that it is possible to prevent unintentional shift to the setting change mode. Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 80, when the setting change mode is terminated, the setting value can be confirmed unless the setting key cylinder 180 is sufficiently rotated to the standby position as shown in FIG. 80(A). Can not. In this case, if the person who has changed the setting forgets to sufficiently perform the rotating operation to the standby position, the set value continues to be displayed on the 7-segment display 300, so that the risk of the set value being grasped by the surroundings becomes high. . Therefore, in the first mode (see FIGS. 26(E) and (F)), the setting change mode ends as soon as the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder 180) starts to rotate from the rotation position. This is preferable in that the set value becomes invisible on the segment display 300 (in a non-display mode).

In the first embodiment, when the setting change mode is set, the setting change image indicating the characters “setting change” is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as a mode suggestion for the setting change mode. SH is displayed, a voice "setting can be changed" is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 are caused to emit light in a special first light emission mode (see FIG. 26B). However, the mode suggestion to the setting change mode may use an effect means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the effect means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, and the panel lamp 54) described above. A production mode other than the above (for example, displaying an effect image or outputting a special sound effect) may be used. For example, a special alarm sound may be output from the speaker 620 or a special character image may be displayed on the display screen 50a. May indicate that the mode is changed to the setting change mode (setting value can be changed).

Further, in the first mode, the mode suggestion (display of the image SH during setting change, output of sound “setting change is possible”, light emission in a special first light emission mode by the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54) is only performed. It only suggests that the set value can be changed, and the selected set value itself cannot be grasped. However, an effect mode in which the selected set value can be grasped may be adopted.

Further, in the above-mentioned first mode, the image SH during the setting change is continuously displayed until the setting change mode ends after the setting change mode is ended, and the voice “setting change is possible” is repeatedly output, and the frame is displayed. The lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 continued to emit light in the special first emission mode. That is, the mode suggestion is continued to be executed only while the setting change mode is set. However, the execution period of the mode suggestion can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the mode suggestion may be executed only for a predetermined period after shifting to the setting change mode, or when the mode suggestion is executed and when it is not executed. You may make it repeat and regularly.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting value selected in the setting changing mode is changed, an upward arrow is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 as a change suggesting suggesting that the setting value is changed. The set value change image YG shown is displayed, the voice "the set value has been changed" is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 are caused to emit light in the special second light emission mode. However, as a change suggestion that suggests that the set value has been changed, an effect means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the effect means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, and the panel lamp 54) described above is used. May be. In addition, an effect mode other than the above (for example, displaying an effect image or outputting a special sound effect) may be used. For example, a sound effect indicating a pitch (pitch) according to a set value is output from the speaker 620. Alternatively, the background image or item image corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the display screen 50a to notify that the set value has been changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, it is possible to change the set value by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 while the setting change mode is set. However, the set value may be changed by operating an operating means other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, a dedicated operating means only for changing the set value, or the input unit 40k or the select button 42k). ..

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode based on the fact that the RAM clear switch 191 (transition operation section) is pressed down when the power is turned on. However, when the power is turned on, it may be possible to shift to the setting change mode on the basis of operating a shift operation unit other than the RAM clear switch 191 (for example, a dedicated switch provided on the game control board 100). In this case, it is preferable that the set value can be changed by operating the shift operation means other than the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode. This is because the number of parts will increase if the shift operation section for shifting to the setting change mode and the operating means for setting the setting value are separately provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the setting change mode is finished, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191. However, if the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed after the setting change mode ends, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 may not be erased. In this case, the employee at the game arcade changes the set value in the setting change mode, and does not press the RAM clear switch 191 after the setting change mode ends, so that the set value remains without erasing the information related to the game. Can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the change suggestion that suggests that the set value has been changed is executed with priority over the mode suggestion that suggests that the set value can be changed. In other words, the setting value change image YG is displayed with priority over the setting change image SH, and the sound "the setting value has been changed" is output rather than the sound "the setting can be changed." Also, the light emission in the special second light emission mode by the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 is performed in priority over the light emission in the special first light emission mode. However, the relationship between the change suggestion and the mode suggestion can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the change suggestion and the mode suggestion may be executed simultaneously (at the same timing). For example, the display of the setting value change image YG and the display of the setting change image SH may be performed in different display areas (first display area and second display area) of the display screen 50a. In addition, for example, while the speaker 620 (first sound output means) provided on the left side outputs a sound “setting can be changed”, the speaker 620 (second sound output means) provided on the right side “changes the set value. You may output a voice saying "I was done". Further, for example, the frame lamp 212 (first light emitting means) may be caused to emit light in the special first light emitting mode while the panel lamp 54 (second light emitting means) may be caused to emit light in the special second light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting value is changed, the entire setting value change image YG is displayed overlaid on the setting change image SH (see FIG. 26C). However, if the setting value change image YG (change suggestion image) is displayed so as to stand out (priority) to the setting change image SH (mode suggestion image), the setting value change image YG is being changed. The images SH may be arranged in any way. For example, a part of the setting value change image YG may be overlapped and displayed on the setting change image SH. Further, the setting value change image YG may be displayed larger than the setting change image SH or may be displayed in a conspicuous display area of the display screen 50a. It should be noted that the display mode of the set value change image YG shows an upward arrow (see FIG. 26C), but it can be appropriately changed as long as it can be suggested that the set value has been changed. Further, the display mode of the setting change image SH shows the character “setting change” (see FIG. 26(B)), but it can be changed appropriately if the situation in which the setting value can be changed can be suggested. is there.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the setting change mode is finished, when the phoenix image FT (see FIG. 36D) that suggests a high setting value is shown as a suggestion effect image that suggests a setting value, or when the lose mode is shown. There was an effect design EZ that suggests the set value by the numeral part. However, suggestive effect images other than the above may be displayed. That is, you may make it perform other than the above-mentioned high setting suggestion production and design setting suggestion production. For example, the suggestion effect image suggesting the set value may be displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect that indicates that the game is not being played.

In the first embodiment, when the high setting suggestive effect is satisfied with the condition that the SP reach is lost and the condition that the number of balls to be launched after the power is turned on has reached a multiple of 10,000 (the predetermined number of balls) is satisfied. Ran to However, it may be executed when only one of the two conditions is satisfied, and the above conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed when it is a big hit or when it is determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, although the high setting suggestion effect can be executed when the setting value is “4”, “5” or “6”, it can be executed only when the setting value is “6”. However, which setting value is used can be changed as appropriate. Further, the high setting suggestive effect is executed after the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in a lost manner (see FIGS. 36C and 36D), but the execution timing of the high setting suggestive effect (display timing of the suggestive effect image) is It can be changed as appropriate. For example, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed before the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 36(B) is executed. Further, instead of the high setting suggestion effect, the low setting suggestion effect may be executed when the set value is “1”, “2” or “3”.

Moreover, in the said 1st form, the symbol setting suggestion effect was performed when it is a loss. However, the execution condition of the symbol setting suggesting effect is not limited to the case of losing, and can be changed appropriately. For example, when it is a big hit or when it is determined by a predetermined lottery, the symbol setting suggesting effect may be executed. Further, in the symbol setting suggesting effect, the setting value is suggested by the numeral portion of the effect symbol EZ showing the losing mode, but the setting value may be suggested by a method other than the effect symbol EZ. For example, the set value may be suggested by the numeral portion attached to the character image or the item image. Further, the set value may be suggested (indication effect image is displayed) at a timing different from the timing (see FIG. 35B) at which the effect design EZ is stopped and displayed.

In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the set value designation command to the effect control microcomputer 121 at the following three timings. That is, the first timing at which the process of step S010 is performed when the power is turned on, the second timing at which the process of step S037 is performed when the set value is changed, and when the set value is confirmed with the end of the setting change mode. There was a third timing for performing the process of step S040. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit the set value designation command at a timing other than the above, for example, even after the setting change mode ends. In this case, for example, the set value designation command may be transmitted at the start of the first fluctuation after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 manages the execution of the set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value (display of the suggestive effect image), and only when the effect controlling microcomputer 121 executes the set value suggesting effect, the set value is designated. You may make it transmit a command.

In the first embodiment, the setting value information stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 is deleted even when the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is deleted based on the pressing operation on the RAM clear switch 191. I tried not to erase. However, when erasing the information related to the game, the set value information may also be erased. In this case, for example, only when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the information relating to the game and the set value information may be deleted immediately after the power is turned on, and then the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the game-related control from being executed even though the set value information is not stored, and the game to be executed in the state where the set value is not set. is there.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the power is turned on, the set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (FIG. 26(B)). reference). However, the set value set in the previous game may be displayed on a display means other than the 7-segment display device 300 (for example, a dedicated display device or the display screen 50a of the image display device 50).

Further, in the first embodiment, when the error mode is entered, the error mode continues until the power is turned off. Therefore, the game control was never executed. However, even if the error mode is entered, the error mode may be terminated and the setting change mode may be entered based on a specific operation. In this case, by setting the set value in the setting change mode, the control relating to the game is executed thereafter. As a result, it is preferable that the game can be executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the error mode, the 7-segment display 300 emits light in the error lighting mode so as to indicate the character “E” as an error suggestion. However, as long as it is a light emission mode that can suggest that the mode is shifted to the error mode, it can be changed as appropriate, for example, "---" in the first display region 310 to the fourth display region 340 (see FIG. 24). Alternatively, the light may be emitted in the light emission mode indicated by.

Further, in the above-described first mode, when the mode is shifted to the error mode, an error notification indicating that the error mode is set is displayed on the display screen 50a, "The set value is not set. Please perform the setting change mode shift operation." The operation suggestion image SE indicating the characters is displayed, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emission mode. However, the error notification may be executed by using a production means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device) other than the production means (the image display device 50, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, and the panel lamp 54) described above. In addition, an effect mode other than the above (for example, a red image is displayed in the display area of the display screen 50a) may be used.

In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on, the setting key 184 (setting key cylinder) 180 is rotated to the rotation position, but the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed down, the mode is shifted to the set value confirmation mode. did. However, it may be possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode based on an operation other than the above. For example, it may be possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode during execution of the control related to the game other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, in the customer waiting state (the state where the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot game is not executed), based on opening the gaming machine frame 2, it is possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode. You can

Further, in the first embodiment, after the setting change mode is finished, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without pressing the RAM clear switch 191. However, after the setting change mode ends, it is suggested that the information related to the game is erased based on the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 191 on a predetermined effect means (for example, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50). Is also good. At this time, the game information may be erased only when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, the employee at the game arcade can arbitrarily select whether or not to erase the information related to the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, in a normal time (when the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position), the resistor T2 functions as a pull-down resistor to cause the game control microcomputer 101 to have an “L” level. The switch signal (second signal) was input. Then, in the setting change mode, the "H" level switch signal (first signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 101. However, in a normal state, a predetermined resistance is made to function as a pull-up resistance, and a "H" level switch signal (first signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 101, and in the setting change mode, for game control. A switch signal (second signal) of “L” level may be input to the microcomputer 101. However, even in this case, if the setting key cylinder 180 is not sufficiently rotated to the rotation position, the setting change mode cannot be entered, and the setting change mode may end as soon as the setting key cylinder 180 starts rotating from the rotation position. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the shift operation means capable of shifting to the setting change mode and confirming the set value is the setting key cylinder 180 capable of rotating operation. However, the shift to the setting change mode and the setting of the set value may be made possible by using other shift operating means such as a direct-movable operating means and a switch-type operating means. .. In addition, an operation unit that enables a shift to the setting change mode and an operation unit that enables a set value to be determined may be separately provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, as soon as the setting key 1184 (setting key cylinder 180) starts to rotate from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting key cylinder switch 180a switches from ON to OFF (see FIG. ) (See (B)), the setting change mode was terminated. However, the setting change mode may be ended at other timing. For example, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated to an intermediate position between the rotation position and the standby position, the setting key cylinder switch 180a may be switched from ON to OFF. The setting key cylinder switch 180a may not be switched from ON to OFF unless the setting key cylinder 180 is completely rotated to the standby position.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value confirmation image SK is displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 26(F), and "the setting value is confirmed" is output from the speaker 620. Is output, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light in the special third light emission mode. However, it may be notified (indicated) that the set value has been correctly determined by another effect mode. For example, a special sound sound may be output from the speaker 620 or a special effect image may be displayed on the display screen 50a to notify that the set value has been correctly determined.

Further, in the first embodiment, after the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the 7-segment display 300 displays the set value, the initial display, and the base display in order. However, the order of these displays can be changed appropriately. For example, the initial display may be started first, the set value may be displayed with the start of the setting change mode, and the base may be displayed when the setting change mode ends. In the above-described embodiment, as the initial display, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 of the 7-segment display device 300 are turned on, but other light emitting modes (lighting modes) may be used and can be appropriately changed. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is that the setting key cylinder 180 is set to the rotational position, the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, and the power switch 195 is switched to ON operation. there were. However, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, the gaming machine frame 2 is open (the inner frame 21 is open to the outer frame, or the front door 23 is open to the inner frame 21), and is in a customer waiting state (special symbol changes Not displayed and the jackpot game is not executed). It should be noted that during the game (during variable display of special symbols or execution of jackpot game), the setting value may be changed by shifting to the setting change mode.

Further, in the first embodiment, the setting change mode can be ended by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position to the standby position. However, the setting change mode may be terminated by using an operating means other than the setting key cylinder 180.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the base in the normal game state is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, the base in other gaming states may be displayed. That is, the 7-segment display 300 may be configured to be able to display the base in the big hit game state, the base in the high-probability state and the short-time state, the base in the normal probability state and the short-time state, and the like. In addition, the base from the time of power-on to the present time (base not classified for each game state) may be displayed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of shot balls is counted based on the detection by the outlet sensor 18a. However, the method for detecting the number of shot balls can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of shot balls is counted based on the detection by the first starting opening sensor 11a, the detection by the second starting opening sensor 12a, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 10a, and the detection by the special winning opening sensor 14a. You can

Further, in the first embodiment, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, the 7-segment display 300 may be capable of displaying information relating to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 other than the base. For example, as the information related to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a payout ball (total prize ball count-firing ball count) or a ball output rate may be displayed. The proportion is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of a winning character, out of the total number of prize balls acquired from the moment the power is turned on to the present time. And in the participation rate, there are a character role ratio and a continuous character ratio. The prize ratio is the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of all the prizes, including the ordinary electric prize (Den Chu 12D) and the special electric prize (big winning device 14D), out of the total prize balls. The number of prize balls). The continuous prize ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of continuous prize balls) acquired based on the continuous operation of the special electric auditors, out of the total prize balls. That is, the continuous winning character ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on only the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the payout control board 170 is provided with the capacitor CA3 capable of supplying backup power. On the other hand, the game control board 100 may be provided with a capacitor capable of supplying backup power. Also in the modification shown in FIG. 76, the game control board 100 may be provided with a capacitor capable of supplying backup power. Also in the modification shown in FIG. 78, the game control board 100 may be provided with a capacitor capable of supplying backup power. In these cases, the relationship between the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 described in FIGS. 12, 76, and 78 is reversed, and the relationship between the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 is reversed. Is.

Moreover, in the first embodiment, when the normal power is not supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control microcomputer 171, the capacitor CA3 of the payout control board 170 is provided to both the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101. It was configured to be able to provide backup power. However, the capacitor CA3 of the payout control board 170 may be configured to be able to supply backup power to either the payout control microcomputer 171 or the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, in the first embodiment, the capacitor CA3 as the backup power supply means is an electric double layer capacitor. However, the backup power supply means may be a capacitor (for example, an electrolytic capacitor) whose electrostatic capacity is smaller than that of the electric double layer capacitor. The backup power supply means may be, for example, a battery instead of the capacitor, and can be changed as appropriate. However, considering the possibility of fire due to heat generation, a capacitor is safer than a battery.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit capable of supplying power based on the power supply (AC24V power) supplied from the outside is configured as the power supply unit 190 (module) capable of mounting the surface mount component. However, the power supply unit may be configured as a power supply board on which surface mount components cannot be mounted. The power supply unit 190 and the power supply board may integrally incorporate a launch control circuit for controlling the launch of a game ball (game medium).

Further, in the first embodiment, the normal power source supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 is DC5V (specific voltage) power. However, power based on other voltages may be used. The backup power source supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 was DC 5V. However, power based on other voltages may be used.

In the first embodiment, the payout control board 170 or the game control board 100 is provided with the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means. However, in addition to the payout control board 170 or the game control board 100, which is a control board (main board) that influences (may affect) the result of the game, a capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means may be provided. That is, the effect control board 120, the image control board 140, and the sub-drive board 162 may be provided with the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means. In this case, the target for supplying the backup power may be the effect control microcomputer 121, the image CPU 141, the image RAM 143, or the like.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the power supply unit 190 supplies the electric power of DC5V (normal power supply) to the game control board 100 which is the board side board through the payout control board 170 which is the frame side board. However, the relationship between the frame-side board and the board-side board is not limited to the relationship between the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the power supply unit 190 supplies electric power of DC5V to the production control board 120 which is the board side board through the firing control board which is the frame side board (the board on which the firing control circuit 175 is mounted). Good. The power supply unit 190 is not limited to the power of DC5V, and may supply the power of DC12V, the power of DC18V, the power of DC24V, and the power of DC37V to the board side board through the frame side board, for example. The frame-side board and the board-side board may be relay boards on which no integrated circuit (IC) is mounted.

In the first embodiment, the model name sticker may have a jackpot winning probability described therein. In this case, the jackpot winning probability for each set value may be described. Then, such a model name sticker is preferably provided adjacent to the 7-segment display 300, as in the above embodiment. With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 when changing the setting. That is, it is possible to change the setting while confirming the jackpot winning probability for each set value. In addition to the model name sticker, a model information sticker in which the jackpot winning probability is described may be attached to the game control board case 100A (lid case 410). The model information sticker in which the jackpot winning probability is described will be referred to as a winning probability sticker. Further, the type of the model information sticker attached to the game control board case 100A can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 are provided on the same board (on the game control board 100), but both components may be provided on different boards. Further, in the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is not provided on the same substrate as the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 (provided on the power supply unit 190), but it is provided on the same substrate. It may be configured to have. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is used as the operation unit for the setting change operation, but an operation unit for the setting change operation may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 191.

Further, in the first embodiment, the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounding the setting key cylinder 180 is a rectangular peripheral wall according to the shape of the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180, but the shape and size of the peripheral wall portion are It can be appropriately changed according to the shape and size of the setting key cylinder.

In the first embodiment, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (lid case 410) are provided on the same plane, but the setting key cylinder 180 is located behind the lid case 410. It does not have to be completely in the same plane as long as it is not clearly projected or retracted in front of the lid case 410. That is, the keyhole surface 186 and the rear surface 410a may be on substantially the same plane. The term "substantially flush" includes the case where they are substantially on the same plane and the case where they are completely on the same plane.

In the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has one set value selected from the small setting range (specific setting range) from "1" to "4". However, the range of selectable setting values is not limited to “1” to “4” and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a pachinko gaming machine in which one setting value is selected from the setting range of "1" to "5", and one of the setting values from two types of "1" or "2" is set. It may be a pachinko machine selected. The minimum settable value is not limited to "1", and may be "0" or "2" or more.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the set value is "4" (small upper limit set value), "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, instead of “6”, for example, “H” or “MAX” may be displayed as the upper limit recognition value that makes it easier to recognize the upper limit value. In the second embodiment, when the set value is “3” (the set value is one smaller than the small upper limit set value), “7” is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, instead of “5”, for example, “h” or “2th” may be displayed as the next upper limit recognition value that makes it easier to recognize a value one smaller than the upper limit value.

Moreover, in the said 2nd form, when the setting value was "1", "1" was displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, instead of "1", for example, "L" or "MIN" may be displayed as the lower limit recognition value that makes it easy to recognize the minimum setting value.

Further, in the second embodiment, the setting value designation command includes information indicating the setting value. At this time, specifically, assuming that the set value is displayed (emits) in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 as it is, the set value designation command includes a lighting portion LB25 of the fourth display area 340. It is also possible to include information corresponding to lighting (light emission) or extinguishing in LB 32.

In the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has one set value selected from the normal set range (specific set range) from "1" to "6". However, the range of selectable setting values is not limited to “1” to “6”, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a pachinko gaming machine in which one setting value is selected from a small setting range of "1" to "5", and either one of the two setting values of "1" or "2" is set. It may be used as a pachinko game machine that is selected. The minimum settable value is not limited to "1", and may be "0" or "2" or more.

In the third mode, the normal setting range from “1” to “6” is replaced with one of the small setting ranges (specific setting ranges) from “1” to “4” as in the second mode. When changing so that one set value can be selected, it is also possible to carry out as follows. That is, in this case, for example, when the set value is set to "4" (small upper limit set value), "7" (recognition value) is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Then, the setting value designation command includes information indicating "6". Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 121 that receives the setting value designation command can display "6" using the image display device 50. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the situation in which the maximum setting value is set on both the 7-segment display device 300 and the image display device 50.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, each lighting portion LB25 when the display value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 in the second byte (specific byte) of the setting value designation command (specific command) The information corresponding to lighting or extinction of the LB 32 is included. However, the first byte of the setting value designation command may include information corresponding to lighting or extinguishing of the lighting portions LB25 to LB32 when the display value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 300. Further, the setting value designation command may be composed of other than 2 bytes. Further, in order to mean the setting value designation command, the information of “10001111” (see FIG. 62) is included in the first byte from bit 7 to bit 0. However, the information other than this is included. However, it can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 64 is used. However, the values of the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value shown in FIG. 64 are examples and can be changed as appropriate. Similarly, the jackpot determination table of the first modification of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 65, the jackpot determination table of the second modification of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 66, and the jackpot determination table of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 67. Also in the jackpot determination table, the values of the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value are examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in these jackpot determination tables, the setting values correspond to the normal setting range from "1" to "6". However, a pachinko gaming machine that selects one setting value from the setting range different from the normal setting range, for example, one setting value is selected from the small setting range from "1" to "4". In the case of a pachinko game machine, a jackpot determination table corresponding to the setting range from "1" to "4" may be used.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 that does not determine whether it is a small hit in the big hit determination process. However, it may be configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of determining whether or not it is a small hit in the big hit determination process. In this case, for example, in the big hit judging table shown in FIG. 64, it is preferable to use a common lower limit judgment value for judging a small hit. That is, the upper limit determination value for determining a small hit is the common lower limit determination value (“10001”)−1=“10000” for determining a big hit. Thereby, it is possible not to substantially set the upper limit determination value for determining a small hit in the large hit determination table. Further, for example, in the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 66, it is preferable to use a common upper limit determination value for determining a small hit. That is, the lower limit determination value for determining a small hit is the upper limit determination value (“19999”)+1 for determining a large hit+1=“20000”. Thereby, it is possible not to substantially set the lower limit determination value for determining a small hit in the large hit determination table.

In the fourth embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 in which one setting value can be selected from the normal setting range from "1" to "6", at power-on (other power-on processing (S024)) The upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the jackpot determination table are expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104. However, in a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value cannot be selected, the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the jackpot determination table when the power is turned on may be expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the other power-on process (S024, initial setting process) of the power-on process (S001), the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the jackpot determination table are set to the game RAM 104. It is designed to be expanded in a predetermined storage area (see FIGS. 69 and 70). However, the above-described processing of expanding the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value may be performed at any timing as long as it is at power-on and before the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed. Alternatively, the process of expanding the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the jackpot determination table into a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 is not executed at power-on, but is executed in the main timer interrupt process (S005). It may be executed only once.

In the fourth embodiment, the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the jackpot determination table are expanded in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 (expansion storage unit). However, the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the jackpot determination table may be expanded in a storage unit other than the game RAM 104.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned forms, the game machine is configured to be shifted to the high-probability state based on the type of the winning jackpot pattern. However, the so-called V certain machine (passing through a specific area (V area) in the special winning opening) Based on the high probability state). Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, once the gaming machine is controlled to the high probability state, the gaming machine is continuously controlled to the high probability state until the start of the next big hit game (so-called probability variation loop type gaming machine). It may be configured as a probabilistic variation of the number of cuts) or a tumble machine (a game machine whose high-probability state ends depending on the result of the lottery). Further, it may be configured as a so-called 1 type/2 type mixing machine or a honey monotype game machine. That is, the invention described in this specification can be suitably applied to game machines having various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the game machine.

Note that, for example, a pachinko gaming machine that is not controlled to a high probability state like a one-and-two-mixer can be configured as follows. That is, the jackpot determination table does not include a table (high-accuracy table) corresponding to the high probability state, but only a table (normal table) corresponding to the normal probability state. The table corresponding to the normal probability state stores a common lower limit determination value (common lower limit determination value) for determining a big hit, regardless of each setting value, while corresponding to each setting value. The upper limit determination value (normal upper limit determination value) for determining a jackpot may be stored. Alternatively, the table corresponding to the normal probability state stores a common upper limit determination value (common upper limit determination value) for determining a jackpot regardless of each setting value, while corresponding to each setting value. A lower limit determination value (normal upper limit determination value) for determining a jackpot may be stored.

Further, as a special game, a small hit game (a short special game in which the total opening time of the special winning opening is a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or less) may be performed. The state where the small hit game is being executed is called the small hit game state.

Further, there may be a plurality (for example, two) of the special winning openings (special winning devices). In this case, the first big winning opening, the first big winning opening sensor that can detect the game ball that has won the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the game that has won the second big winning opening The game machine is provided with a second special winning opening sensor capable of detecting a ball.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are acquired as the random number (determination information) acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12, but one Alternatively, a random number may be acquired, and based on the random number, whether or not it is a big hit, the type of hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of variation pattern may be determined. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of random numbers to be acquired based on the start winning and what to determine in each random number.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) under the control condition that the special symbol indicating that the jackpot is won and stopped is displayed. On the other hand, it may be configured as a slot machine (rotary type gaming machine, pachi-slot gaming machine).

The type of slot machine may be any type. In the case of a so-called normal machine (A type slot machine) that increases the number of medals obtained by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus, a state where a bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is executed corresponds to a special game state. In addition, if it is a so-called ART machine or AT machine that increases the number of medals to be won during a special game period such as ART (assist replay time) or AT (assist time) that can frequently win a small role, the state of ART or AT Corresponds to the special game state. Also, in the normal machine, the control condition to the special game state is to win the big bonus or the regular bonus, and on the activated pay line, the combination of the symbols that trigger the transition to the big bonus or the regular bonus is It is to be derived and displayed as the display result of the reel. In addition, in the ART machine and the AT machine, the control condition for the special game state is that, for example, after winning the execution lottery of the ART or AT, the prescribed number of games is exhausted and the timing of activating the ART or AT is reached. is there.

14. Inventions Shown in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following embodiments of the invention are shown in the above-mentioned embodiments. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
Unlike a predetermined setting range (normal setting range) from 1 to a predetermined upper limit setting value (“6”), a specific setting range (1) to a small upper limit setting value (“4”) smaller than the upper limit setting value ( In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) that is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value by selecting one setting value from the (small setting range),
Equipped with display means (7-segment display 300) capable of displaying,
The display means is
When the small upper limit setting value is selected from the specific setting range, the upper limit setting value (“6”) or the upper limit recognition value (“H”) that makes it easy to recognize the upper limit value can be displayed. (See FIG. 59(E)) is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, unlike the predetermined setting range from 1 to the predetermined upper limit setting value, one setting value can be selected from the specific setting range from 1 to the small upper limit setting value. However, if the small upper limit set value is selected and the small upper limit set value is displayed on the display unit, it becomes difficult to know whether or not it is the maximum set value in the specific setting range. Therefore, in this case, the upper limit set value in the predetermined setting range or the upper limit recognition value for easily recognizing the upper limit value is displayed on the display means. Accordingly, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the maximum setting value is set on the display unit, and it is possible to prevent misunderstanding when the setting value is displayed on the display unit.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine described in Means A1,
The display means is
When a setting value (“3”) that is one smaller than the small upper limit setting value is selected from the specific setting range, a setting value (“5”) that is one smaller than the upper limit setting value, or The gaming machine is characterized in that the next upper limit recognition value ("h") that can easily recognize a value one smaller than the upper limit value can be displayed (see FIG. 59D).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the setting value which is one smaller than the small upper limit setting value is selected, the setting value is not displayed on the display means, but is larger than the upper limit setting value in the predetermined setting range. Also, the next upper limit set value is displayed, which makes it easier to recognize a set value that is one smaller than the set value or a value that is one smaller than the upper limit. This makes it easy to understand that the second largest set value is set on the display means.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine described in Means A1 or Means A2,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
And a production control means capable of controlling production (production control microcomputer 121),
The game control means, when the small upper limit setting value (“4”) is selected from the specific setting range, the predetermined command (including the information indicating the small upper limit setting value (“4”)) A game machine characterized by being capable of transmitting a setting value information designation command of the second form) to the effect control means (see FIG. 58(B)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the small upper limit setting value is selected, the display means displays the upper limit setting value in the predetermined setting range, or the upper limit recognition value for easily recognizing the upper limit value. The control means transmits a predetermined command including information indicating the small upper limit set value to the effect control means. In this way, the game control means does not include the information converted from the small upper limit setting value into the upper limit setting value or the upper limit recognition value in the predetermined command, and can simplify the control processing. Then, for the effect control means, if the information indicating the small upper limit setting value is known, it is possible to know what the setting value from 1 is, so there is no particular problem.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, by setting a set value, a game is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value. In this type of gaming machine, the set value is selected from any one of predetermined set ranges from "1" to a predetermined upper limit set value (for example, "6"), and the display means The selected set value is displayed on the (for example, 7-segment display). Here, unlike the predetermined setting range, when the game machine is configured to select one setting value from a specific setting range from 1 to a small upper limit setting value (eg, “4”) smaller than the upper limit setting value There is. In the case of the gaming machine of this configuration, it is conceivable that the small upper limit set value is displayed as the setting value, since the small upper limit set value is selected as the set value. However, there is a risk of misunderstanding because it is not known that the small upper limit set value displayed on the display means is the maximum set value that can be set. Therefore, in the invention according to the means A1 to A3, with respect to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2003-199931, the display means sets the upper limit when the small upper limit set value is selected from the specific setting range. The difference is that it is possible to display a value or an upper limit recognition value that makes it easier to recognize the upper limit value. With this, it is possible to solve the problem (to achieve the operational effect) of providing a gaming machine in which it is difficult to give a misunderstanding when the set value is displayed on the display means.

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
By selecting one setting value from the specific setting range (“1” to “6”), in the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) that is played with the jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value,
Equipped with display means (7-segment display 300) capable of displaying,
The display means is
When a predetermined setting value (for example, “6”) is selected from the specific setting range, the predetermined setting value is not displayed and the predetermined setting value is not displayed in the specific setting range. It is a gaming machine characterized by being able to display a recognition value (“H”) that makes it easy to recognize whether it is a large setting value (maximum setting value) (see FIG. 61(F)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the predetermined setting value is selected from the specific setting range, the display means does not display the predetermined setting value, and the predetermined setting value is set in the specific setting range. A recognition value is displayed that makes it easy to recognize the largest setting value. In this way, it is possible to show without question the magnitude of the set value selected on the display means.

The invention according to means B2 is
In the gaming machine described in Means B1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
And a production control unit (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling display on the production display unit (image display device 50),
The game control means, when the predetermined setting value (for example, “6”) is set from the specific setting range, a specific command (first) including information indicating the recognition value (“H”) It is possible to transmit three types of setting value designation commands) to the effect control means (see FIG. 60(B)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the predetermined setting value is set, the recognition value is displayed on the display means, and the game control means includes information indicating the recognition value with respect to the effect control means. Send a specific command. Therefore, for example, when the effect control means displays (indicates) the recognition value using the effect display means, the display of the recognition value on the effect display means and the display of the recognition value on the display means may be the same. This is possible, and it is possible to prevent discomfort due to different displays.

The invention according to means B3 is
In the gaming machine described in Means B2,
The specific setting range is different from the predetermined setting range from 1 to a predetermined upper limit setting value, and is a range from 1 to a small upper limit setting value (eg, “4”) smaller than the upper limit setting value (normal setting). It is a gaming machine characterized by being a range).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, for example, when the small upper limit setting value is selected, the display means displays the recognition value that makes it easy to recognize whether the setting value is the largest in the specific setting range. It Further, in this case, since the game control means transmits the specific command including the information indicating the recognition value to the effect control means, it is possible to display the recognition value on the effect display means. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the situation in which the maximum set value is set on both the display means and the effect display means.

The invention according to means B4 is
In the gaming machine according to means B2 or means B3,
The display means is a 7-segment display (7-segment display 300) capable of turning on or off a plurality of segments (lighting portions LB1 to LB32),
The specific command is provided with a specific byte (second byte) consisting of 8 bits,
Each bit forming the specific byte includes information corresponding to lighting or extinguishing of each segment when the recognition value is displayed on the 7-segment display (see FIG. 62). It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, each bit forming the specific byte of the specific command includes information corresponding to lighting or extinguishing of each segment when the recognition value is displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, the game control means can easily configure the specific command including the information indicating the recognition value.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, by setting a set value, a game is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value. In this type of gaming machine, the set value is selected from any one of predetermined set ranges from "1" to a predetermined upper limit set value (for example, "6"), and the display means The selected set value is displayed on the (for example, 7-segment display). Here, when the set value is selected to be "5", for example, a method of displaying "5" on the display means can be considered. However, in this case, is the set value selected as "5" in the gaming machine in which the set value can be selected from the predetermined set range from "1" to the predetermined upper limit set value (for example, "6")? Or, in a gaming machine in which a setting value can be selected from a setting range from "1" to a small upper limit setting value smaller than a predetermined upper limit setting value (for example, "5"), the setting value is selected as "5". It's hard to know if it will be done. Therefore, it may be misunderstood how much the set value is selected on the display means. Therefore, the invention according to the means B1 to B4 is, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, the display means, when a predetermined set value is selected from a specific set range, the predetermined set value. It is different in that it is possible to display a recognition value that makes it easy to recognize how much the predetermined setting value is within the specific setting range without displaying the setting value. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that can show how much the set value is selected on the display means without misunderstanding (the effect is achieved).

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
The game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the normal probability state or the high probability state in which the jackpot determination probability is higher than the normal probability state,
By selecting one setting value from a predetermined setting range (normal setting range from "1" to "6"), a gaming machine (pachinko) that is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value. In the gaming machine PY1),
A high-probability table corresponding to the high-probability state (a table for the high-probability state shown in FIG. 64) and a normal table (a table for the normal-probability state shown in FIG. 64) corresponding to the normal-probability state. ,
A common lower limit determination value (“10001”) for determining a big hit is stored in at least one of the high-accuracy use table and the normal use table,
In the high-accuracy use table, a high-accuracy upper limit determination value (“11871”, “11945”, “12018”) for determining a big hit in the high probability state, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range. "12191", "12411", "12533") are stored respectively,
In the normal use table, a normal use upper limit determination value (“10509” “10529” “10549” “10596” corresponding to each set value included in the setting range for determining a big hit in the normal probability state. ""10656""10689") are stored respectively,
In the gaming machine, the game control means can determine whether it is a big hit with reference to the common lower limit determination value and the high accuracy upper limit determination value or the normal upper limit determination value. is there.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the common lower limit determination value is stored in at least one of the high-accuracy table and the normal table, and the high-accuracy table and the normal table each have a high-accuracy corresponding to each set value. The upper limit value for use and the upper limit value for normal are stored. That is, the high-accuracy use table and the normal use table do not store the lower limit determination value for determining a big hit, corresponding to each of the set values, but one common lower limit determination value. Only. Thus, even in the gaming machine set to any of the plurality of setting values, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the table that stores the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value for determining whether or not it is a big hit.

The invention according to means C2 is
The game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the normal probability state or the high probability state in which the jackpot determination probability is higher than the normal probability state,
By selecting one setting value from a predetermined setting range (normal setting range from "1" to "6"), a gaming machine (pachinko) that is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value. In the gaming machine PY1),
A high probability table corresponding to the high probability state (a table for the high probability state shown in FIG. 66) and a normal table corresponding to the normal probability state (a table for the normal probability state shown in FIG. 66) are provided. ,
A common upper limit determination value (“19999”) for determining a big hit is stored in at least one of the high accuracy table and the normal table,
In the high-accuracy use table, a high-accuracy lower limit determination value (“18129”, “18055”, “17982”) for determining a big hit in the high probability state, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range. "17809", "17589", "17467") are stored respectively,
In the normal use table, a lower limit judgment value for normal use (“19491” “19471” “19451” “19404” corresponding to each set value included in the setting range for determining a big hit in the normal probability state. "19344" and "19311") are stored respectively,
In the gaming machine, the game control means can determine whether it is a big hit with reference to the common upper limit determination value and the high-accuracy lower limit determination value or the normal lower limit determination value. is there.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the common upper limit judgment value is stored in at least one of the high-accuracy table and the normal table, and the high-accuracy table and the normal table each have a high-accuracy corresponding to each set value. The use lower limit value and the normal use lower limit value are stored. That is, the high-accuracy use table and the normal use table do not store the upper limit determination value for determining a big hit corresponding to each set value, but one common upper limit determination value. Only. Thus, even with a gaming machine set to any of a plurality of setting values, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the table that stores the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value for determining whether or not it is a big hit. is there.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, by setting a set value, a game is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value. In this type of gaming machine, the set value is selected from any one of predetermined set ranges from "1" to a predetermined upper limit set value (eg, "6"). Then, a table in which the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value for determining whether or not the jackpot is the jackpot is set in advance is stored, and the obtained jackpot random number is the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value. It will be judged as a jackpot if it is between. However, when it is attempted to store the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value for determining whether or not it is a big hit in the table corresponding to each of the setting values, as compared with a gaming machine in which the setting value cannot be selected, There is a problem that the storage capacity of the table is significantly increased. Therefore, in the invention according to the means C1 to C2, a common lower limit determination value determined as a big hit is provided on at least one of the high-accuracy table and the normal table with respect to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-199931. The high-accuracy use table is stored, and the high-accuracy upper limit determination value for determining a big hit in a high probability state is stored in correspondence with each setting value included in the setting range. In the table for use, corresponding to each set value included in the set range, the normal upper limit determination value for determining a big hit in the normal probability state is stored, and the game control means uses the common lower limit determination value. And the high-accuracy upper limit determination value or the normal upper limit determination value, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the table that stores the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value (providing a working effect).

<Means D>
The invention according to means D1 is
By selecting one setting value from a predetermined setting range (normal setting range from "1" to "6"), a gaming machine (pachinko) that is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value. In the gaming machine PY1),
A game control unit (for game) capable of executing game control processing (game control processing from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 43) after executing initial setting processing (other power-on processing (S024)) at power-on CPU 102),
A development storage unit (game RAM 104) capable of developing information,
The game control unit,
In the initial setting process, the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value for determining a big hit corresponding to the selected setting value can be expanded in the expansion storage unit (the process of step S027 can be executed),
In the game control process, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a jackpot by referring to the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value developed in the development storage unit (step S1043). It is possible to execute the processing of 1)).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value corresponding to the set value are expanded in the expansion storage unit by the initial setting process when the power is turned on. After that, the game control unit can determine whether or not it is a big hit by referring to the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value developed in the development storage unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the processing in which the game control unit refers to the set value and also refers to the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the table corresponding to the set value every time the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control unit.

The invention according to means D2 is
In the gaming machine described in Means D1,
The game control unit, it is possible to control a high probability state with a jackpot determination probability higher than the normal probability state or the normal probability state,
A high-probability table corresponding to the high-probability state (a table for the high-probability state shown in FIG. 64) and a normal table (a table for the normal-probability state shown in FIG. 64) corresponding to the normal-probability state. ,
A common lower limit determination value (“10001”) for determining a big hit is stored in at least one of the high-accuracy use table and the normal use table,
In the high-accuracy use table, a high-accuracy upper limit determination value (“11871”, “11945”, “12018”) for determining a big hit in the high probability state, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range. "12191", "12411", "12533") are stored respectively,
In the normal use table, a normal use upper limit determination value (“10509” “10529” “10549” “10596” corresponding to each set value included in the setting range for determining a big hit in the normal probability state. ""10656""10689") are stored respectively,
The game control unit,
In the initial setting process, the common lower limit determination value, the high-accuracy upper limit determination value and the normal upper limit determination value corresponding to the selected setting value can be expanded in the expansion storage unit (step S1043 Process can be executed)
In the game control process, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined determination condition, refer to the common lower limit determination value and the high-accuracy upper limit determination value or the normal upper limit determination value developed in the development storage unit. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (the process of step S1043 can be executed), and the gaming machine is characterized.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the common lower limit judgment value is stored in the high-accuracy table and the normal table, and the high-accuracy upper limit judgment corresponding to each set value is stored in each of the high-accuracy table and the normal table. The value and the lower limit judgment value for normal are stored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control unit while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the table that stores the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value for determining whether it is a big hit.

The invention according to means D3 is
In the gaming machine described in Means D1,
The game control unit, it is possible to control a high probability state with a jackpot determination probability higher than the normal probability state or the normal probability state,
A high probability table corresponding to the high probability state (a table for the high probability state shown in FIG. 66) and a normal table corresponding to the normal probability state (a table for the normal probability state shown in FIG. 66) are provided. ,
A common upper limit determination value (“19999”) for determining a big hit is stored in at least one of the high accuracy table and the normal table,
In the high-accuracy use table, a high-accuracy lower limit determination value (“18129”, “18055”, “17982”) for determining a big hit in the high probability state, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range. "17809", "17589", "17467") are stored respectively,
In the normal use table, a lower limit judgment value for normal use (“19491” “19471” “19451” “19404” corresponding to each set value included in the setting range for determining a big hit in the normal probability state. "19344" and "19311") are stored respectively,
The game control unit,
In the initial setting process, the common upper limit determination value, the high-accuracy lower limit determination value and the normal lower limit determination value corresponding to the selected setting value can be expanded in the expansion storage unit (step S1043 Process can be executed)
In the game control process, refer to the common upper limit determination value and the high-accuracy lower limit determination value or the normal lower limit determination value that are expanded in the expansion storage unit based on the establishment of the predetermined determination condition. Then, it is possible to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (the process of step S1043 can be executed), and the gaming machine is characterized.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the common upper limit judgment value is stored in the high-accuracy table and the normal table, and the high-accuracy lower limit judgment corresponding to each set value is stored in each of the high-accuracy table and the normal table. The value and the lower limit judgment value for normal are stored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control unit while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the table that stores the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value for determining whether it is a big hit.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-199931, by setting a set value, a game is played with a jackpot determination probability corresponding to the set value. In this type of gaming machine, the set value is selected from any one of predetermined set ranges from "1" to a predetermined upper limit set value (eg, "6"). Then, a table in which a lower limit determination value and an upper limit determination value for determining whether or not the jackpot is the jackpot is set is stored in advance, and the game control unit (gaming CPU) acquires the jackpot. If the random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value, it will be judged as a big hit. Here, in the case of a gaming machine in which a setting value can be selected from a predetermined setting range, the game control unit refers to the setting value when determining whether it is a big hit, and is stored in a table corresponding to the setting value. A method of referring to the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value may be considered. However, in the case of this method, every time it is determined whether it is a big hit, the process of referring to the set value and the process of referring to the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value stored in the table corresponding to the setting value are performed. However, there is a problem that the processing load of the game control unit is large. Therefore, in the inventions related to the means D1 to D3, the game control unit determines that it is a big hit in the initial setting process in the game machine described in JP-A-2003-199931. The upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value can be expanded in the expansion storage unit, and the upper limit determination value and the lower limit judgment expanded in the expansion storage unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition in the game control process. The difference is that it can be determined whether or not it is a big hit by referring to the value. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load of the game control unit (to achieve the operational effect).

PY1... Pachinko gaming machine 50... Image display device 50a... Display screen 54... Board lamp 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 102... Game CPU
104... RAM for game
120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 212... Frame lamp 300... 7-segment display 620... Speaker

Claims (2)

It is provided with a game control means capable of controlling to a normal probability state or a high probability state in which the jackpot determination probability is higher than the normal probability state,
By selecting one setting value from the preset setting range, in the gaming machine to be played with the jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value,
A high accuracy table corresponding to the high probability state and a normal table corresponding to the normal probability state,
At least one of the high accuracy table or the normal table, a common lower limit determination value for determining a big hit is stored,
In the high accuracy table, corresponding to each set value included in the setting range, high accuracy upper limit determination value for determining a big hit in the high probability state is stored,
In the normal table, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range, the normal upper limit determination value for determining a big hit in the normal probability state is stored,
The game control means is capable of determining whether it is a big hit with reference to the common lower limit determination value and the high-accuracy upper limit determination value or the normal upper limit determination value. It is provided with a game control means capable of controlling to a normal probability state or a high probability state in which the jackpot determination probability is higher than the normal probability state,
By selecting one setting value from the preset setting range, in the gaming machine to be played with the jackpot determination probability corresponding to the setting value,
A high accuracy table corresponding to the high probability state and a normal table corresponding to the normal probability state,
At least one of the high accuracy table or the normal table, a common upper limit determination value for determining a big hit is stored,
In the high-accuracy use table, corresponding to each setting value included in the setting range, a high-accuracy lower limit determination value for determining a big hit in the high probability state is stored,
In the normal table, corresponding to each set value included in the setting range, the normal lower limit determination value for determining a big hit in the normal probability state is stored,
The game control means is capable of determining whether it is a big hit with reference to the common upper limit determination value and the high-accuracy lower limit determination value or the normal lower limit determination value.